Контроллер nice 3000 коды ошибок

9 Troubleshooting

Fault

Code

Controller

Err10

overload

Err11

Motor overload

Power supply

Err12

phase loss

9

Power output

Err13

phase loss

Module

Err14

overheat

— 270 —

Name

Possible Causes

● This fault is reported

generally when the

controller runs at the

current higher than the

rated value for a long

time. The causes include:

● The mechanical

resistance is too large.

● The balance coefficient is

improper.

● The encoder feedback

signal is abnormal.

● Motor auto-tuning is not

performed properly (the

elevator running current is

higher than the normal in

this case).

● FC-02 is set improperly.

● The mechanical

resistance is too large.

● The balance coefficient is

improper.

● The power input phases

are not symmetric.

● The drive control board

fails.

● The output wiring of the

main circuit is loose.

● The motor is damaged.

● The ambient temperature

is too high.

● The fan is damaged.

● The air filter is clogged.

NICE3000

Solution

1. Eliminate mechanical problems:

● Check whether the brake is released,

and whether the brake power supply is

normal.

● Check whether the balance coefficient is

proper.

● Check whether the guide shoes are too

tight.

2. Check the motor auto-tuning result:

● Check whether the encoder feedback

signal and parameter setting are correct,

and whether the initial angle of the

encoder for the PMSM is correct.

● Check the motor parameter setting and

perform motor auto-tuning again.

3. If this fault is reported when the slip

experiment is carried on, perform the slip

experiment by using the function set in F3-

24.

● Restore FC-02 to the default value.

● Refer to the solution of Err10.

● Check whether the three phases of

power supply are balanced and whether

the power voltage is normal. If not, adjust

the power supply.

● Contact us or directly our agent.

● Check whether the motor wiring is

secure.

● Check whether the RUN contactor on the

output side is normal.

● Eliminate the motor fault.

● Lower the ambient temperature.

● Clear the air filter.

● Replace the damaged fan.

● Check whether the installation clearance

of the controller satisfies the requirement.

new

User Manual

Level

4A

3A

4A

4A

5A

0 Пользователей и 1 Гость просматривают эту тему.

NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                               Preface

- 1 -
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the NICE3000
new
 integrated elevator controller.
The NICE3000
new
 is a new-generation integrated elevator controller independently 
developed by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd., by optimizing the NICE3000 
controller based on a large number of applications and combining new industrial features.
The NICE3000
new
 has the following advantages:
1.  It supports high-performance vector control and open-loop low speed running. It can 
drive both asynchronous motor and permanent magnetic synchronous motor (PMSM), 
and implement switchover between the two types of motors easily by modifying only one 
parameter.
2.  It supports direct parallel connection of two elevators and supports the CANbus and 
Modbus communication protocols for remote monitoring, which reduces the required 
quantity of travling cables. 
3.  It supports a maximum of 40 floors and is widely applied to elevators used in the 
residence, ofce buildings, shopping centers, and hospitals. 
This manual describes the correct use of the NICE3000
new
, including product features, 
safety information and precautions, installation, parameter setting, commissioning, and 
maintenance & inspection. Read and understand the manual before using the product, and 
keep it carefully for future maintenance.
The personnel who involve in system installation, commissioning, and maintenance must 
receive necessary safety and use training, understand this manual thoroughly, and have 
related experience before performing operations.
Notes
 
•
The drawings in the manual are sometimes shown without covers or protective guards. 
Remember to install the covers or protective guards as specied rst, and then perform 
operations in accordance with the instructions.
 
•
The drawings in the manual are shown for description only and may not match the product 
you purchased.
 
•
The instructions are subject to change, without notice, due to product upgrade, specication 
modication as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience of the manual. 
 
•
Contact our agents or customer service center if you have some questions during the use.





Introduction                                                                                                       NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 2 -
Introduction
1. Comparison with the NICE3000
The following table lists the comparison between the NICE3000
new
 and the NICE3000.
Item NICE3000 NICE3000
new
Maximum number of 
oors
31 (standard) 40 (standard)
Maximum elevator 
speed
4 m/s 4 m/s
I/O terminals 24 inputs, 6 outputs
24 inputs, 6 outputs, 3 high-voltage 
inputs
CANbus 1 x CANbus 2 x CANbus
Modbus 1 x Modbus 1 x Modbus
 Motor driving type
Separate control for 
synchronous and 
asynchronous motors
Integrated control for synchronous and 
asynchronous motors
No-load-cell startup
Supporting SIN/COS 
encoder only
Supporting:
 
•
Push-pull encoder
 
•
Open-collector incremental encoder
 
•
UVW encoder
 
•
SIN/COS encoder
 
•
Endat encoder
Control mode
 
•
Sensorless ux vector 
control (SFVC)
 
•
Closed-loop vector 
control (CLVC)
 
•
Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC)
 
•
Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
 
•
V/F control
LCD operator Not support Support
Inside-car 
commissioning
Not support Support





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                        Introduction

- 3 -
2. Connection to peripheral devices

NICE3000
new 
integrated elevator 
controller
Ground
AC input 
reactor
Electromagnetic 
contactor
Moulded case 
circuit breaker 
(MCCB) or earth 
leakage circuit 
breaker (ELCB)
Three-phase AC 
power supply
Braking resistor 
Noise filter on 
input side
P(+)
BR
Braking unit
+
-
Motor
External operation 
panel
Output 
reactor
Ground
Ground
MF.K
RUN
STOP
RES
QUICK
PRG ENTER
RUN
LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
RPM
%
A VHz
Use within the allowable 
power supply specification 
of the controller.
Select a proper breaker 
to resist large in-rush 
current that flows into the 
controller at power-on.
To guarantee safety, use an 
electromagnetic contactor. Do not 
use it to start or stop the controller 
because such operation reduces 
the service life of the controller.
Suppress the high order 
harmonic to improve the 
power factor.
Reduce the 
electromagnetic 
interference on 
the input side.
Reliably ground the 
motor and the 
controller to prevent 
electric shock.

 
•
Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller. 
Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge 
suppressor.
 
•
Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere 
with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an anti-
interference lter to minimize the interference.
 
•
For more details on peripheral devices, refer to related selection guidelines.





Introduction                                                                                                       NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 4 -
3. Function list of the NICE3000
new
Common Running Functions
Full collective 
selective
In automatic running or attendant state, this function enables the 
elevator to respond both car calls and hall calls. Passengers at any 
service oor can call the elevator by pressing the up call button and 
down call button.
Door open holding 
time setting
The system automatically determines different door open time for door 
open for call, command, protection, or delay according to the set door 
open holding time.
Door open holding 
In automatic running state, passengers can press the door open button 
in the car to delay door open to facilitate goods to be moved in/out.
Door machine 
service oor setting
You can set the required service oors of the door machines.
Door pre-close 
by the door close 
button
During door open holding in automatic running state, passengers 
can press the door close button to close the door in advance, which 
improves the efciency.
Floor number 
display setting
The system supports display of oor numbers in combinations 
of numbers and letters, which meets the requirements of special 
conditions.
Light curtain signal 
judgment
If the door is blocked by stuff during door close, the light curtain 
acts and the elevator opens the door. This function is invalid in re 
emergency state.
Auxiliary operation 
box
An optional auxiliary operation box that has the same functions as the 
main operation box is available.
Independent control 
of the front door 
and back door
When there are two doors for a car, automatic control on the two doors 
depends on your requirements.
Repeat door close
If the door lock is not applied after the elevator performs door close 
for a certain time, the elevator automatically opens the door and then 
closes the door again.
Independent 
command
When the main and auxiliary operation boxes are congured, they can 
independently control door open/close according to the commands in 
automatic running state.
Voice 
announcement
The elevator automatically announces information such as the running 
direction and next arriving oor during running.
Auto-leveling
The systems implements automatic accurate leveling based on the 
oor pulse counting and up/down leveling feedback signals.
Response at 
acceleration
The system allows the elevator to automatically respond to calls from 
the service oors during acceleration.
Down collective 
selective control
In automatic running or attendant state, the elevator responds only to 
hall down calls besides car calls.
Idle elevator 
returning to base 
oor
In automatic running state, the elevator automatically returns to the set 
parking oor and waits for passengers if there is no car call or hall call 
within the set time.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                        Introduction

- 5 -
Landing at another 
oor
If the door open time exceeds the door open protection time but the 
door open limit signal is still inactive, the elevator closes the door and 
then automatically runs to the next landing oor. The system reports 
fault Err55.
Forced door close
When the door fails to close within the set time due to the action of the 
light curtain or safety edge, the elevator enters the forced door close 
state, closes the door slowly, and gives a prompt tone.
Cancellation of 
wrong calls
Passengers can press the button consecutively twice to cancel wrong 
calls.
Service oor setting
You can enable or disable the system service for certain oors exibly 
based on actual requirements.
Time-based oor 
service
You can exibly set the time periods and corresponding service oors 
or select the service oors by using the service oor switchover switch.
Independent 
running
The elevator does not respond to any call, and the door needs to 
be closed manually. In the case of group control, the elevator runs 
independently out of the group control system.
Attendant running
In attendant state, the running of the elevator is controlled by the 
attendant.
Low-speed self-
rescue
When the elevator is in non-inspection state and stops at non-leveling 
area, the elevator automatically runs to the leveling area at low speed if 
the safety requirements are met, and then opens the door.
Door control 
function
You can set whether the system keeps outputting commands after door 
open limit and door close limit based on the type of the door machine.
Car arrival gong
After the elevator arrives at the destination oor, the CTB gives a 
prompt tone.
Hall arrival forecast 
indicator
When the elevator will arrive at the destination oor soon, the hall 
arrival forecast indicator becomes ON.
Hall arrival gong
After the elevator will arrive at the destination oor soon, the system 
outputs the hall arrival gong.
Hall I/O extension 
function
If the hall I/O terminals are not sufcient, more terminals can be 
provided by using an HCB-B board.
Car I/O extension 
function
If the car I/O terminals are not sufcient, more terminals can be 
provided by using an HCB-B board.
Button stuck check
The system can automatically identify whether a hall call button is stuck 
and cancel the stuck call, preventing the condition that the elevator 
cannot close and run due to stuck hall calls.
Automatic 
startup torque 
compensation
The system automatically implements startup torque compensation 
based on the current car load, achieving smooth startup and improving 
the riding comfort.
Direct stop
The system automatically calculates and generates the running curves 
based on the distance, enabling the elevator to directly stop at the 
leveling position without creeping.
Automatic 
generation of 
optimum curve
The system automatically calculates the optimum speed curve 
compliant with the human-machine function principle based on the 
distance, without being limited by the number of curves or short oor.





Introduction                                                                                                       NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 6 -
Service suspension 
output
When the elevator cannot respond to hall calls, the corresponding 
terminal outputs the service suspension signal.
Running times 
recording
In automatic running state, the system automatically records the 
running times of the elevator.
Running time 
recording
The system automatically records the accumulative power-on time, 
working hours, and working days of the elevator.
Automatic door 
open upon door 
lock abnormality
If the system detects that the door lock circuit is abnormal during door 
open/close, the elevator automatically opens and closes the door again, 
and reports a fault after the set door open/close times is reached.
VIP service
The elevator rst directly runs to the VIP oor and provides services for 
special persons.
Specied elevator 
preferred
The specied elevator is preferred to respond to calls of specied 
oors.
Disability service
When the elevator is waiting at the leveling position, if there is a call at 
this oor from the disability operation box, the door open holding time is 
prolonged. It is the same for the back door.
Full-load direct 
running
When the car is full-loaded in automatic running state, the elevator 
does not respond to hall calls from the passing oors. These halls calls, 
however, can still be registered, and will be executed at next time of 
running (in the case of single elevator) or by another elevator (in the 
case of group control).
Overload protection
When the car load exceeds the rated elevator load, the elevator alarms 
and stops running.
Fault data recording
The system automatically records detailed information of faults, which 
helps improve the efciency of maintenance and repair.
Inspection-related Functions
Simple 
maintenance 
keypad
The 3-button keypad on the MCB provides the functions such as 
commissioning the running oors and door open/close.
Operation box 
commissioning
The LCD operator can be connected to the system in the car for 
elevator commissioning, which improves the commissioning efciency.
Shaft auto-tuning
Shaft auto-tuning is required before rst-time automatic running. During 
shaft auto-tuning, the elevator runs from the bottom oor to the top oor 
at the inspection speed and automatically records all position signals in 
the shaft. 
User-dened 
parameter display
You can view the parameters that are modied and different from the 
default setting.
Inspection running
After entering the inspection state, the system cancels automatic 
running and related operations. You can press the up or down call 
button to make the elevator jog at the inspection speed.
Motor auto-tuning
With simple parameter setting, the system can obtain the motor 
parameters no matter whether the motor is with-load or without load. 
Floor position 
intelligent correction
Every time the elevator runs to the terminal oor, the system 
automatically checks and corrects the car position information based on 
slow-down switch 1, and eliminates over travel top terminal or bottom 
terminal with use of the slow-down switches.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                        Introduction

- 7 -
Dual-speed for 
inspection
Considering inaccurate running control at high inspection speed but 
a long running time at low inspection speed, the system provides the 
dual-speed curve for inspection, which greatly improves the efciency 
at inspection.
Test running
The test running includes the fatigue test of a new elevator, car call 
oor test, hall call test, and tests such as hall call response forbidden, 
door open/close forbidden, terminal oor limit switch shielded, and 
overload signal shielded.
Fire Emergency and Security Functions
Returning to 
base oor at re 
emergency
After receiving a re emergency signal, the elevator does not respond 
to any call but directly runs to the re emergency oor and waits.
Fireghter running
After the elevator enters the reghter running mode, door open/close 
is implemented by the jog operation (optional) by using the door open 
and close buttons rather than automatically. In addition, the elevator 
responds to only car calls and only one call can be registered once.
Security oor
After the security oor function is enabled, the security oor is used at 
10:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m, and the elevator runs to the security oor rst 
every time, stops and opens the door, and then runs to the destination 
oor.
Elevator lock
In automatic running state, when the elevator lock switch acts or the 
set elevator time is reached, the elevator cancels all registered calls, 
returns to the elevator lock oor, stops running, and turns off the lamp 
and fan in the car.
Troubleshooting 
based on fault level
Faults are classied into different levels based on the severity. Different 
levels of faults are rectied using different methods.
Runaway 
prevention
The system detects the running state of the elevator in real time. If the 
elevator speed exceeds the limit, the system immediately stops running 
of the elevator.
Automatic 
identication of 
power failure
The system automatically identies power failure and outputs the relay 
signal for emergency evacuation automatic switchover to implement 
emergency evacuation at power failure.
Automatic running 
mode switchover at 
power failure
For the synchronous motor, when the power supply is interrupted, the 
system can perform automatic switchover between shorting stator 
braking mode and controller drive mode, implementing quick and stable 
self-rescue.
Shorting stator braking mode: Upon power failure, UPS is used, the 
motor stator is shorted, and the brake is automatically released, making 
the car move slowly under the effect of the weighing difference between 
the car and the counterweight.
Running direction 
self-identication at 
power failure
When the power supply is interrupted, the system can automatically 
identify the current car load and determine the running direction.
Base oor 
verication
After detecting a position abnormality, the system runs the elevator to 
each oor until reaching the terminal oor for verication, guaranteeing 
system security.





Introduction                                                                                                       NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 8 -
Passenger 
unloading
The system automatically determines the fault level. If the safety 
running conditions are met, the elevator rst runs to the leveling 
position to unload passengers.
Interference degree 
judgment
The system judges the degree of interference on the communication.
Earthquake 
protection
When the earthquake detection device acts and inputs a signal to the 
system, the elevator lands at the nearest oor and stops running. After 
the earthquake signal becomes inactive and the fault is reset manually, 
the elevator restores to normal running.
Current cancellation 
in ramp mode
For the PMSM, after the elevator decelerates to stop, the holding 
current of the motor is cancelled in ramp mode, preventing abnormal 
noise during current cancellation.
Independent 
working power 
supply
The NICE3000
new
 system supports not only three-phase 380 VAC but 
also single-phase 220 VAC to meet different applications of the power 
supply system (such as 220 V UPS)
Automatic voltage 
identication
The system detects the bus voltage and automatically adjusts the 
running speed of the elevator to adapt to the situation of insufcient 
power from power supply (such as emergency UPS).
Parallel/Group Control and Other Functions
Parallel control
The system supports parallel control of two elevators and provides 
multiple scheduling algorithms to meet requirements of different 
customers.
Dispersed waiting In parallel control, the elevators can wait at different oors.
Parallel/Group 
control exit
If the parallel/group control exit switch of a certain elevator in a parallel/
group control system is valid or the time for exiting the parallel/group 
control is reached, the elevator exits parallel/group control and runs 
independently. This does not affect normal running of the parallel/group 
control system.
Parallel/Group 
control automatic 
exit
If an elevator in the parallel/group control system cannot respond to 
calls in time due to faults, the elevator automatically exits the parallel/
group control system and runs independently. This does not affect 
normal running of the parallel/group control system.
Anti-nuisance 
function
The system automatically judges the number of passengers in the 
car and compares it with the number of registered car calls. If there 
are excessive car calls, the system determines that it is nuisance and 
cancels all car calls. In this case, passengers need to register correct 
car calls again.
Prompt of non-door 
zone stop
The system gives a prompt when the elevator stops at a non-door zone 
area due to faults.
Full-load indication
When the elevator is full-loaded, a full-load indication is displayed on 
the HCBs and the elevator directly runs to the desired oors.
Interface for 
intelligent 
residential 
management
The system provides an interface for intelligent residential management 
to perform remote monitoring on the state of elevators in the residential 
district.
Parameter copy
You can conveniently upload and download parameters of the system 
by using the LCD operator.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                        Introduction

- 9 -
Energy-saving Functions
Car energy-saving
If there is no running command within the set time, the system 
automatically cuts off the power supply to the lamp and fan in the car.
Energy-saving 
running with 
standby power 
supply
When the normal power supply is interrupted and the emergency power 
supply is used, the system reduces the running speed of the elevator in 
the prerequisite of guaranteeing the smooth running curve.
Arrival gong 
disabled at night
Within the set time period, the arrival gong is disabled.
Energy-saving of 
idle door machine
After the car lamp is turned off, the system does not output the door 
close command, which reduces power consumption of the door 
machine.
4. Optional functions
Function Description Remark
Micro-leveling
After landing at a oor, the elevator may move 
upward or downward due to the load change and 
the car door is not aligned with the ground, which 
is inconvenient for in and out of passengers and 
goods. In this case, the system allows the elevator 
to run to the leveling position in the door open state 
at the leveling speed.
MCTC-SCB 
required
Power failure 
emergency 
evacuation
For the elevator congured with UPS, the system 
uses the UPS to implement low-speed self-rescue in 
the case of power failure.
UPS required
Onsite 
commissioning
The system can control and monitor running of 
elevators by using the NEMS software.
NEMS 
software 
required
Residential 
monitoring
The control system can be connected to the 
terminal in the monitoring room. By using the NEMS 
software, you can view the oor position, running 
direction, and fault state of the elevator.
NEMS and 
accessories 
required
Remote monitoring
The control system can be connected to the terminal 
(such as PC) in the monitoring room. By using the 
NEMS software, you can view the oor position, 
running direction, and fault state of the elevator.
MCTC-MIB 
required
Door pre-open
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is 
smaller than 0.2 m/s and the door zone signal is 
active, the system shorts the door lock by means of 
the shorting door lock circuit contactor and outputs 
the door open signal, implementing door pre-open. 
This improves the elevator use efciency.
MCTC-SCB 
required
IC card
Passengers can use an IC card to go to oors that 
require authorization.
IC card 
required
Operation 
restoration
In case of an incorrect setting, you can restore to 
parameters of the last operation state.
LCD operator 
required





Contents
Preface ................................................................................................................ 1
Introduction .......................................................................................................... 2
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions.................................................. 14
1.1 Safety Precautions ...................................................................................................... 14
1.2 General Precautions .................................................................................................... 17
1.3 Protective Functions .................................................................................................... 19
Chapter 2 Product Information .......................................................................... 22
2.1 System Conguration of the NICE3000
new
 ............................................................
22
2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description................................................................... 23
2.3 Models and Specications ........................................................................................... 24
2.4 Technical Specications .............................................................................................. 25
2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions ........................................................ 27
2.6 Optional Parts .............................................................................................................. 29
2.7 Selection of Braking Resistor ...................................................................................... 30
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation ............................................... 34
3.1 NICE3000
new
 Integrated Elevator Controller ................................................................ 34
3.2 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB) ............................................................................................. 40
3.3 Display Board (MCTC-HCB)........................................................................................ 43
3.4 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB) ............................................................................................ 53
3.5 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card ................................................................... 56
3.6 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices ................................................................... 59
3.7 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE3000
new
 Control System ................................... 60
3.8 Installation of Shaft Position Signals ........................................................................... 60
Chapter 4 Use of the NICE3000
new
 .................................................................... 66
4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad ........................................................................................ 66
4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel ................................................................................. 70
4.3 Use of the LCD Operator ............................................................................................. 73
Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example ............................ 78
5.1 System Commissioning ............................................................................................... 78
5.2 System Application ...................................................................................................... 89





Chapter 6 Function Code Table ....................................................................... 104
6.1 Function Code Description ........................................................................................ 104
6.2 Function Code Groups .............................................................................................. 104
6.3 Function Code Table .................................................................................................. 105
Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes........................................................ 136
Group F0: Basic Parameters ........................................................................................... 136
Group F1: Motor Parameter ............................................................................................ 138
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters ............................................................................. 141
Group F3: Running Control Parameters .......................................................................... 144
Group F4: Floor Parameters............................................................................................ 147
Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters ....................................................................... 148
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters ............................................................................. 159
Group F7: Test Function Parameters .............................................................................. 171
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters ..................................................................... 173
Group F9: Time Parameters ............................................................................................ 176
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters ........................................................................... 177
Group Fb: Door Function Parameter ............................................................................... 188
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters .................................................................... 190
Group Fd: Communication Parameters ........................................................................... 194
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters ....................................................................... 196
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters .................................................................... 200
Group FF: Factory Parameters........................................................................................ 201
Group FP: User Parameters ............................................................................................ 201
Chapter 8 EMC ................................................................................................ 204
8.1 Denition of Terms ..................................................................................................... 204
8.2 Introduction to EMC Standard ................................................................................... 204
8.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices........................................................................ 205
8.4 Shielded Cable .......................................................................................................... 208
8.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems ................................................... 211
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting .............................................................................. 214
9.1 Description of Fault Levels ........................................................................................ 214
9.2 Fault Information and Troubleshooting ...................................................................... 215









1
Safety Information and Precautions





Safety Information and Precautions                                                                NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 14 -
Chapter 1 Safety Information and Precautions
In this manual, the notices are graded based on the degree of danger:
 
•

DANGER

 indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe 
personal injury or even death.
 
•

WARNING

 indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in potential 
risk of severe personal injury or even death.
 
•

CAUTION

 indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in minor or 
moderate personal injury or equipment damage.
In addition, 

NOTE

 appearing in other chapters indicates that an unintended result or 
situation may occur if the notice is not complied with.
The notices in this manual you have to observe are aimed at guaranteeing your personal 
safety, as well as to prevent damage to the controller or the parts connected to it. Read this 
manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding and perform all operations by 
following the notices in this chapter. Monarch will assume no liability or responsibility for any 
injury or loss caused by improper operation.
1.1 Safety Precautions
Use Stage
Safety 
Grade
Precautions
Warning

WARNING

 
•
This controller has hazardous high voltage and the controlled 
motor is a dangerous rotating device. Failure to comply with 
the notices may result in personal injury or damage to the 
property.
 
•
Transportation, installation, operation and maintenance of 
the controller can be performed only by qualied personnel 
after they get familiar with the safety information in this 
manual. This is the prerequisite of safe and stable running of 
the equipment.
 
•
Do not open the front cover or touch the power terminals 
on the main circuit within 10 minutes after the controller is 
powered off. The capacitor on the DC circuit still has residual 
high voltage even after power-off. Failure to comply will 
result in electric shock.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                Safety Information and Precautions                                         

- 15 -
Use Stage
Safety 
Grade
Precautions
During 
Installation

DANGER

 
•
Do not install the equipment if you nd water seepage, 
component missing or damage upon unpacking.
 
•
Do not install the equipment if the packing list does not 
conform to the product you received.
 
•
Install the equipment on incombustible objects such as 
metal, and keep it away from combustible materials. Failure 
to comply may result in a re.

WARNING

 
•
Do not loosen the xed screws of the components, especially 
the screws with red mark.
 
•
Do not install the controller on vibrating parts. Failure 
to comply may result in damage to the equipment or 
unexpected accidents.

CAUTION

 
•
Handle the equipment with care during transportation to 
prevent damage to the equipment.
 
•
Do not drop wire end or screw into the controller. Failure to 
comply will result in damage to the controller.
 
•
Do not use the equipment with damaged or missing 
components. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
 
•
Do not touch the components with your hands. Failure to 
comply will result in static electricity damage.
 
•
Install the controller in places free of vibration and direct 
sunlight.
At Wiring

DANGER

 
•
Wiring must be performed only by qualied personnel under 
instructions described in this manual. Failure to comply may 
result in unexpected accidents.
 
•
A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply 
and the controller. Failure to comply may result in a re.
 
•
Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure 
to comply may result in electric shock.
 
•
Tie the controller to ground properly by standard. Failure to 
comply may result in electric shock.

WARNING

 
•
Never connect the power cables to the output terminals (U, 
V, W) of the controller. Pay attention to the marks of the 
wiring terminals and ensure correct wiring. Failure to comply 
will result in damage to the controller.
 
•
Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus 
terminals (+) and (-). Failure to comply may result in a re.

CAUTION

 
•
Ensure that the cabling satises the EMC requirements and 
the regional safety standard. Use wire sizes recommended 
in the manual. Failure to comply may result in accidents.
 
•
Use a shielded cable for the encoder, and ensure that the 
shield is reliably grounded at one end.
 
•
Use a twisted cable with twisted distance of 20−30 mm 
as the communication cable, and ensure that the shield is 
reliably grounded.





Safety Information and Precautions                                                                NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 16 -
Use Stage
Safety 
Grade
Precautions
During 
running

DANGER

 
•
All peripheral devices must be connected properly according 
to the circuit wiring instructions provided in this manual. 
Failure to comply will result in accidents
 
•
Cover the controller properly before power-on to prevent 
electric shock.
 
•
Do not open the controller’s cover after power-on. Failure to 
comply may result in electric shock.
 
•
Do not touch the controller and peripheral circuits with wet 
hand. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
 
•
Do not touch any I/O terminal of the controller. Failure to 
comply may result in electric shock.
 
•
The controller performs safety detection on external strong 
power circuits automatically at the beginning of power-on. 
Do not touch the U, V, W terminals of the controller or the 
motor terminals at the moment. Failure to comply may result 
in electric shock.
 
•
Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the 
temperature. Failure to comply will result in personal burnt.
 
•
Signal detection must be performed only by qualied 
personnel during operation. Failure to comply will result in 
personal injury or damage to the controller.

WARNING

 
•
Do not touch the rotating part of the motor during the motor 
auto-tuning or running. Failure to comply will result in 
accidents.
 
•
Check that the following requirements are met:
 
•
The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the 
rated voltage class of the controller.
 
•
The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W) 
are properly connected.
 
•
No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
 
•
The wiring is secured. 
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.

CAUTION

 
•
For synchronous motor, ensure that motor auto-tuning is 
performed successfully. Perform trial running before resuming 
the steel rope so as to make the motor run properly.
 
•
Avoid objects falling into the controller when it is running. 
Failure to comply will result in damage to the controller.
 
•
Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the 
controller because such test has been done in the factory. 
Failure to comply will result in accidents.
 
•
Do not change the default settings of the controller. Failure 
to comply will result in damage to the controller.
 
•
Do not start/stop the controller by opening or closing the 
contactor. Failure to comply will result in damage to the 
controller. Failure to comply will result in damage to the 
controller.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                Safety Information and Precautions                                         

- 17 -
Use Stage
Safety 
Grade
Precautions
During 
maintenance

DANGER

 
•
Do not repair or maintain the controller at power-on. Failure 
to comply will result in electric shock.
 
•
Repair or maintain the controller when its voltage is lower 
than 36 VAC, about two minutes after the controller is 
powered off. Otherwise, the residual voltage in the capacitor 
may result in personal injury.
 
•
Do not allow unqualied personnel to repair or maintain the 
controller. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or 
damage to the controller.

WARNING

 
•
Repair or maintenance of the controller may be performed 
only by the center authorized by Monarch or qualied 
personnel. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or 
damage to the controller.
 
•
Power supply must be cut off before repair or maintenance 
of the controller. 

CAUTION

 
•
Set the parameters again after the controller is replaced. All 
the pluggable components must be plugged or removed only 
after power-off.
 
•
Strictly obey the laws and regulations and repair and 
maintain the elevator equipment periodically. Only timely 
troubleshooting can ensure the safety of passengers.
Disposal

CAUTION

The packaging materials, screws and terminal blocks can be 
re-used and it is suggested that you keep them well for future 
use.

WARNING

The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may 
explode when they are burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when 
the plastic parts are burnt. Treat them as ordinary industrial 
waste.
1.2 General Precautions
1.  Motor insulation test
Perform the insulation  test when the motor is used for the rst  time, or when it is reused 
after being stored for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the poor 
insulation of motor windings from damaging the controller. The motor must be disconnected 
from the controller during the insulation test. A 500-V mega-Ohm meter is recommended for 
the test. Ensure that the insulation resistance is not less than 5 MΩ.
2.  Thermal protection of the motor
If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the controller, especially 
when the rated power of the controller is greater than that of the motor, adjust the motor 
protection parameters on the operation panel of the controller or install a thermal relay for 
the motor circuit for protection.





Safety Information and Precautions                                                                NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 18 -
3.  Motor heat and noise
The output of the controller is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic 
wave, and therefore, the motor temperature rise, noise, and vibration are slightly greater 
than those at running with the power frequency (50 Hz).
4.  Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor on the output side of the controller
The controller outputs PWM waves, and therefore, do not install the capacitor for improving 
power factor or lightning protection voltage-sensitive resistor on the output side of the 
controller. Otherwise, the controller may suffer transient overcurrent or even be damaged.
5.  Contactor on the input and output sides of the controller
When a contactor is installed between the input side of the controller and the power supply, 
the controller must not be started or stopped by opening or closing the contactor. When a 
contactor is installed between the output side of the controller and the motor, do not open or 
close the contactor when the controller has output. Otherwise, modules inside the controller 
may be damaged.
6.  Use outside the rated voltage
The controller must not be used outside the allowable voltage range specified in this 
manual. Otherwise, components inside the controller may be damaged. If required, use a 
corresponding voltage step-up or step-down device.
7.  Surge suppressor
The controller has a built-in voltage dependent resistor (VDR) for suppressing the surge 
voltage generated when the inductive loads (electromagnetic contactor, electromagnetic 
relay, solenoid valve, electromagnetic coil and electromagnetic brake) around the controller 
are switched on or off. If the inductive loads generate very high surge voltage, use a surge 
suppressor for the inductive load or also use a diode.

Note

Do not connect the surge suppressor on the output side of the controller.
8.  Altitude and de-rating
In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin air, it 
is necessary to de-rate the controller. Contact Monarch for technical support.
9.  Adaptable motor
The controller is adaptable to squirrel-cage asynchronous motor or AC PMSM. Select a 
proper controller according to motor nameplate.
The default parameters configured inside the controller are squirrel-cage asynchronous 
motor parameters. It is still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the default 
values based on actual conditions. Otherwise, the running effect and protection performance 
will be affected. For PMSM, motor auto-tuning must be performed.
10. Precautions on selecting residual-current circuit breaker (RCCB)
Tripping may be caused if an improper RCCB is selected when the controller drives the 
motor. This is because the output wave of the controller has high harmonics and the motor 





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                Safety Information and Precautions                                         

- 19 -
cable and the cable connecting the controller and the motor produce leakage current, which 
is much larger than the current when the motor runs at power frequency (50 Hz).
Thus, it is necessary to determine the proper RCCB sensitivity based on the general 
leakage current of the cables and the motor. The leakage current is dependent on the motor 
capacity, cable length, insulation class and wiring method. Generally, the leakage current on 
the output side of the controller is three times of the current when the motor runs at power 
frequency (50 Hz).
1.3 Protective Functions
Adopting different protective functions for different levels of faults, the NICE3000
new
 provides 
the elevator running system with full abnormality protection. For detailed solutions to the 
faults, see chapter 8.
Faults of the controller are classied as follows:
1.  Speed abnormal
The controller monitors the encoder feedback speed and output torque. Once the 
feedback speed exceeds the limit or the deviation between the torque limit and the 
speed feedback is too large, the controller performs protection immediately, reports an 
alarm and prohibits running.
2.  Drive control abnormal
The related faults include drive overcurrent, overvoltage/undervoltage, power input/
output phase loss, overload, and storage abnormality. If such a fault occurs, the 
controller performs protection immediately, stops output, applies the brake and prohibits 
running.
3.  Encoder abnormal
The related faults include encoder phase loss, direction reversing, wire-breaking, and 
pulse interference. If such a fault occurs, the controller performs protection immediately 
to avoid unexpected accidents. If pulse interference is large, the controller reports 
an alarm immediately. If pulse interference is small, the controller performs position 
correction every time it receives a leveling signal and clears the accumulative error.
4.  Leveling sensor abnormal
The related faults include sensor failure or sensor stuck. The controller judges whether a 
fault occurs based on the leveling signal change. If the leveling signal does not change 
within the set time, the system reports an alarm.
5.  Floor data abnormal
The system stores the oor information through the shaft auto-tuning. If the oor data 
is abnormal, the system prompts the fault information at the rst-time running. During 
actual running, the controller continuously compares position information input by DIs 
with the stored oor data. If the deviation is large, the system reports an alarm.





Safety Information and Precautions                                                                NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 20 -





2
Product Information





Product Information                                                                                          NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 22 -
Chapter 2 Product Information
2.1 System Conguration of the NICE3000
new
The NICE3000
new
 series integrated elevator control system combines the functions of 
both elevator controller and the high-performance vector controller. It mainly includes the 
integrated elevator controller, car top board (MCTC-CTB), hall call board (MCTC-HCB), 
car call board (MCTC-CCB), and optional door pre-open module, and remote monitoring 
system.
The following gure shows the system components.
Figure 2-1 System components of the NICE3000
new

MCTC-CTB
MCTC-CCBMCTC-HCB
LED operation panel 
(MDKE) or LCD 
operator (MDKE3)
Load cell
MCTC-HCB
MCTC-HCB
CANbus
Modbus
Host 
computer
NICE3000
new
 integrated controller
CANbus
Communication 
in parallel mode
Synchronous or 
asynchronous motor

1.  It controls the motor based on feedback signals from the encoder, and records 
information of all position switches in the shaft by pulse, implementing accurate leveling 
and direct travel ride and guaranteeing running safety.
2.  It implements information collection and control of car-related components by means of 
CANbus communication with the MCTC-CTB.
3.  It registers and displays  hall calls  of all  oors with easy address setting  by means  of 
Modbus communication with the MCTC-HCB.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                          Product Information                                         

- 23 -
The following gure shows the system structure of the NICE3000
new
.
Figure 2-2 System structure of the NICE3000
new

Braking 
unit
Drive circuit 
of the motor
Power supply 
circuit
Control 
circuit of 
the 
controller
MCTC-HCB
MCTC-CCB
Input power
CANbus
Modbus
MCTC-CTB
Modbus
MCTC-HCB
NICE3000
new
 
integrated 
controller
MCTC-HCB
MCTC-HCB
M
Encoder
Motor
Encoder feedback
U
V
W

2.2 Designation Rules and Model Description
Figure 2-3 Designation rules and nameplate of the NICE3000
new

MODEL:    NICE-L-C-4015 
INPUT:      3PH AC380V  36A  50/60Hz    
OUTPUT:  3PH AC 0~380V  33A  0~90Hz    
Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co.Ltd
S/N:             010150602803825403
POWER:   15kW
Rating namplate
Controller model
Power class
Rated input
Rated output
Manufacturing SN
NICE–L–C–40 15
NICE series integrated 
elevator  controller
A
Asynchronous motor
Mark
Motor Type
B
Synchronous motor
C
Synchronous
/Asynchronous motor 
integrator
L
Mark Controller Type
Specialized for 
elevators
20
Single-phase/
Three-phase 220 V
Mark
Voltage Class
40
Three-phase 380 V
02 2.2 kW
Mark
03 3.7 kW
... ...
Power Class
30 30 kW
45 45 kW
Nameplate 
position
NICE3000
new
integrated 
elevator 
controller

Note that the NICE3000
new
 has multiple voltage classes and power classes. For details, see 
the Table 2-1.





Product Information                                                                                          NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 24 -
2.3 Models and Specications
Table 2-1 NICE3000
new
 models and specications
Controller Model
Power 
Capacity (kVA)
Input Current 
(A)
Output Current 
(A)
Motor Power 
(kW)
Single-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V
NICE-L-C-2002 2.3 13.2 5.2 1.1
NICE-L-C-2003 3.4 17 7.5 1.5
220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8 29 10.3 2.2
220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1 36 15.5 3.7
220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9 41 19 4.0
220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3 40 22.5 5.5
220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1 49 27.7 11
220-NICE-L-C-4030 33 61 34.6 15
Three-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V
NICE-L-C-2002 4.0 11.0 9.6 2.2
NICE-L-C-2003 5.9 17.0 14.0 3.7
220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0 29.0 18.0 4.0
220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0 36.0 27.0 5.5
220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0 41.0 33.0 7.5
220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0 40.0 39.0 11.0
220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0 49.0 48.0 15.0
220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0 61.0 60.0 18.5
Three-phase 380 V, range: 340−450 V
NICE-L-C-4002 4.0 6.5 5.1 2.2
NICE-L-C-4003 5.9 10.5 9.0 3.7
NICE-L-C-4005 8.9 14.8 13.0 5.5
NICE-L-C-4007 11.0 20.5 18.0 7.5
NICE-L-C-4011 17.0 29.0 27.0 11.0
NICE-L-C-4015 21.0 36.0 33.0 15.0
NICE-L-C-4018 24.0 41.0 39.0 18.5
NICE-L-C-4022 30.0 49.5 48.0 22.0
NICE-L-C-4030 40.0 62.0 60.0 30.0
NICE-L-C-4037 57.0 77.0 75.0 37.0
NICE-L-C-4045 69.0 93.0 91.0 45.0
NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 112 55





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                          Product Information                                         

- 25 -

Note

1. In terms of single-phase and three-phase 220 VAC, NICE-L-A/B-2002 and NICE-L-A/B-2003 
are specially designed for 220 VAC. The other models that are marked by prexing "220-" are 
modied from the three-phase 380 VAC models.
2. Same models are available for single-phase 220 VAC and three-phase 220 VAC. Pay attentions 
to the power class of the adaptable motor during the use.
3. Select the proper controller output current based on the rated motor current. Ensure that the 
controller output current is equal to or greater than the rated motor current.
4. If you require high voltage or power class, contact Monarch.
2.4 Technical Specications
Table 2-2 Technical specications of the NICE3000
new
Item Specication
Basic 
specications
Maximum frequency 300 Hz
Carrier frequency
2–16 kHz, adjusted automatically based on the load 
features
Motor control mode
Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC)
Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
Startup torque
0.5 Hz: 180% (SFVC)
0 Hz: 200% (CLVC)
Speed stability 
accuracy
±0.5% (SFVC) ±0.05% (CLVC)
Torque control 
accuracy
±5% (CLVC)
Overload
60s for 150% of the rated current, 1s for 200% of the 
rated current
Motor auto-tuning With-load auto-tuning; no-load auto-tuning
Distance control
Direct travel ride mode in which the leveling position 
can be adjusted exibly
Acceleration/
Deceleration curve
N curves generated automatically
Slow-down
New reliable slow-down function, automatically 
identifying the position of the slow-down shelf
Shaft auto-tuning
32-bit data, recording the position in the shaft 
accurately
Leveling adjustment Flexible and easy leveling adjustment function
Startup torque 
compensation
Load cell startup pre-torque compensation
No-load-cell startup pre-torque self-adaption
Real-time clock
Real-time clock for time-based oor service, peak 
service and automatic password





Product Information                                                                                          NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 26 -
Item Specication
Basic 
specications
Test function
Easy to implement multiple elevators commissioning 
functions.
Fault protection Solutions to different levels of elevator faults
Intelligent 
management
Remote monitoring, user management, and group 
control adjustment
Security check of 
peripheral devices 
after power-on
Security check of peripheral devices, such as 
grounding and short circuit, after power-on
Status monitor
Monitoring the state of feedback signals to ensure 
that the elevator works properly
I/O feature
Digital input (DI)
24 x DI
Input specication: 24 V, 5 mA
3 heavy-current detection input terminals of safety 
circuit and door lock circuit
Input specication: 95−125 V
Analog input (AI) AI (voltage range: –10 V to +10 V)
Communication port
2 CANbus communication ports
1 Modbus communication port
Output terminal 
block
6 relay outputs
The terminals can be allocated with different 
functions.
Encoder interface
Supporting different encoders by using an optional 
PG card
Operation and 
display
LED operation 
panel
5-digit LED display, querying/modifying most 
parameters and monitoring the system state
Keypad
3-digit LED display, implementing certain 
commissioning functions 
LCD operator
Querying/modifying all parameters, uploading/
downloading parameters and monitoring various 
status parameters of the system, including running 
curves
Status monitor
Connecting the control system and the host computer, 
convenient for querying/motoring the system state.
Environment
Altitude Below 1000 m (de-rated 1% for each 100 m higher)
Ambient 
temperature
–10°C to +40°C (de-rated if the ambient temperature 
is above 40°C)
Humidity Maximum relative humidity 95%, non-condensing
Vibration Maximum vibration: 5.9 m/s
2
 (0.6 g)
Storage 
temperature
–20°C to +60°C





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                          Product Information                                         

- 27 -
2.5 Physical Appearance and Mounting Dimensions
The following figures show the physical appearance and mounting dimensions of the 
NICE3000
new
.
Figure 2-4 Physical appearance of the NICE3000
new
Figure 2-5 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000
new

A
B
W
H
D
Φ





Product Information                                                                                          NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 28 -
Table 2-3 Mounting dimensions of the NICE3000
new
Controller Model
A
(mm)
B
(mm)
H
(mm)
W 
(mm)
D
(mm)
Hole 
Diameter 
(mm)
Gross 
Weight 
(kg)
Size
Single-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V
NICE-L-C-2002
150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-C
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-D220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-E220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
Three-phase 220 V, range: 200−240 V
NICE-L-C-2002
150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-C
NICE-L-C-2003
220-NICE-L-C-4007
150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-D220-NICE-L-C-4011
220-NICE-L-C-4015
220-NICE-L-C-4018
235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-E220-NICE-L-C-4022
220-NICE-L-C-4030
Three-phase 380 V, range: 340−450 V
NICE-L-C-4002
150 334.5 347 223 143 6.5 10 SIZE-CNICE-L-C-4003
NICE-L-C-4005
NICE-L-C-4007
150 334.5 347 223 173.5 6.5 12 SIZE-DNICE-L-C-4011
NICE-L-C-4015
NICE-L-C-4018
235 541.5 554.5 289.6 223 6.5 14.5 SIZE-ENICE-L-C-4022
NICE-L-C-4030
NICE-L-C-4037
260 580 549 385 265 10 32 SIZE-FNICE-L-C-4045
NICE-L-C-4055





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                          Product Information                                         

- 29 -
2.6 Optional Parts
If any optional part in the following table is required, specify it in your order.
Table 2-4 Optional parts of the NICE3000
new
Name Model Function Remark
External 
braking unit
MDBUN
It is provided for the NICE3000
new
 
of 37 kW and above.
For details, see section 
2.7 "Selection of 
Braking Resistor".
PG card
MCTC-PG-A2
It is used to adapt to the push-pull 
and open-collector incremental 
encoders.
-
MCTC-PG-D
It is used to adapt to the UVW 
differential encoder and applied to 
synchronous motor.
It requires 5 V power supply.
-
MCTC-PG-E
It is used to adapt to the SIN/COS 
encoder.
-
MCTC-PG-F1
It is used to adapt to the 
absolute encoder (Heidenhain 
ECN413/1313)
-
Car top 
board 
(CTB)
MCTC-CTB
The MCTC-CTB is the car control 
board of the NICE3000
new
. It has 
8 DIs, 1 AI and 9 relay outputs (7 
as standard conguration). It can 
communicate with the CCB and 
HCB simultaneously.
-
Hall call 
board 
(HCB)
MCTC-HCB
The HCB receives the passenger 
calls and displays the oor where 
the elevator is located and the 
running direction. It can also be 
used as car display board.
A number of HCB 
models are available. 
For details, see section 
3.3.
Car call 
board 
(CCB)
MCTC-CCB
The MCTC-CCB is another 
interface for passengers to interact 
with the control system. It mainly 
collects the car alls and outputs 
the call indicator state. 
-
External 
LED 
operation 
panel
MDKE
It is the external LED display and 
operation panel.
It provides the RJ45 
interface for connecting 
to the controller.
Hand-
held LCD 
operator
MDKE3
It is the external LCD display and 
operator.
You can copy 
parameters by using 
this operation panel.
Extension 
cable
MDCAB
It is a standard 8-core network 
cable and can be connected to 
MDKE and MDKE3.
The cable length is 
3 m in the standard 
conguration.





Product Information                                                                                          NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 30 -
2.7 Selection of Braking Resistor
The NICE3000
new 
models of 30 kW and below have a built-in braking unit, and you only need 
to connect an external braking resistor between PB and + terminals. For models above 30 
kW, you need to install a braking unit and a braking resistor externally.
Select the braking resistor based on the conguration listed in the following table.
Table 2-5 Braking resistor selection for the NICE3000
new
 models
Controller Model
Power of 
Adaptable 
Motor (kW)
Max. 
Resistance 
(Ω)
Min.
Resistance 
(Ω)
Power of 
Braking 
Resistor (W)
Braking Unit
Single-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 1.1  145.0  125.0  300 
Built-in
NICE-L-C-2003 1.5  105.0  90.0  450 
220-NICE-L-C-4007 2.2  72.0  63.0  600 
220-NICE-L-C-4011 3.7  43.0  37.0  1100 
220-NICE-L-C-4015 4.0  40.0  35.0  1200 
220-NICE-L-C-4018 5.5  29.0  25.0  1600 
220-NICE-L-C-4022 11.0  18.0  16.0  3500 
220-NICE-L-C-4030 15.0  13.0  13.0  4500 
Three-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 2.2  72.0  65.0  600 
Built-in
NICE-L-C-2003 3.7  54.0  50.0  1100 
220-NICE-L-C-4007 4.0  40.0  35.0  1200 
220-NICE-L-C-4011 5.5  29.0  25.0  1600 
220-NICE-L-C-4015 7.5  26.0  22.0  2500 
220-NICE-L-C-4018 11.0  14.5  13.0  3500 
220-NICE-L-C-4022 15.0  13.0  12.5  4500 
220-NICE-L-C-4030 18.5  12.5  12.0 5500 
Three-phase 380V
NICE-L-C-4002 2.2 290  230 600
Built-in
NICE-L-C-4003 3.7 170  135 1100
NICE-L-C-4005 5.5 115  90 1600
NICE-L-C-4007 7.5 85  65 2500
NICE-L-C-4011 11 55  43 3500
NICE-L-C-4015 15 43  35 4500
NICE-L-C-4018 18.5 34.0  25 5500
NICE-L-C-4022 22 24  22 6500
NICE-L-C-4030 30 20  16 9000





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                          Product Information                                         

- 31 -
Controller Model
Power of 
Adaptable 
Motor (kW)
Max. 
Resistance 
(Ω)
Min.
Resistance 
(Ω)
Power of 
Braking 
Resistor (W)
Braking Unit
NICE-L-C-4037 37 16.0  13 11000 MDBUN-45-T
NICE-L-C-4045 45 14.0  11 13500 MDBUN-60-T
NICE-L-C-4055 55 12.0  10 16500 MDBUN-60-T

Note

1. The preceding conguration takes the synchronous motor as an example. The asynchronous 
motor has poor energy transfer efciency, and you can reduce the power of the braking resistor or 
increase the resistance of the braking resistor.
2. It is recommended that you select the braking resistor closest to the maximum resistance.





Product Information                                                                                          NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 32 -





3
Mechanical and Electrical Installation  





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 34 -
Chapter 3 Mechanical and Electrical Installation
3.1 NICE3000
new
 Integrated Elevator Controller
3.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements
Item Requirements
Ambient 
temperature
-10°C to 50°C
Heat dissipation
Install the controller on the surface of an incombustible object, and 
ensure that there is sufcient space around for heat dissipation.
Install the controller vertically on the support using screws.
Mounting location
Free from direct sunlight, high humidity and condensation
Free from corrosive, explosive and combustible gas
Free from oil dirt, dust and metal powder
Vibration Less than 0.6 g
3.1.2 Installation Clearance Requirements
The clearance that needs to be reserved varies with the power class of the NICE3000
new
, as 
shown in the following gure.
Figure 3-1 Clearance around the NICE3000
new
 for installation

B
B
A
A
Hot air
Cold air
1.1-18.5 kW
A 
≥ 
10 mm
B 
≥ 
100 mm
22-45 kW
A 
≥ 
50 mm
B 
≥ 
100 mm
Installation Clearance requirements 
on the NICE3000
new
 of different 
power classes
Power Class Clearance Requirements
The controller should be 
installed veritically upward.
NICE3000
new

The NICE3000
new
 is installed vertically upward on the support with screws fixed into the four 
mounting holes, as shown in the following gure.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 35 -
Figure 3-2 Diagram of mounting holes

4-M5x15 bolt
4-M5×15 screw
4-M5x15 washer
Fixing 
backplane
NICE3000
new
 
integrated 
elevator 
controller
4-M6×15 bolt
4-M6×15 screw
4-M6×15 washer
1.1 kW 
≤ 
P 
≤ 
15 kW
18.5 kW 
≤ 
P 
≤ 
45 kW
2.5 Nm
With fixing 
washer
Fastening 
torque
3.5 Nm
With fixing 
washer
Fastener

The controller is generally installed in the control cabinet of the elevator equipment room. 
Pay attention to the following points when designing the control cabinet:
1. The temperature inside the cabinet must not rise to 10°C higher than the temperature 
outside the cabinet.
2. A closed control cabinet must be congured with a fan (or other air cooling device such as 
air conditioner) to ensure air circulation.
3. The air from the fan must not blow directly to the drive unit because this easily causes 
dust adhesion and further a fault on the drive unit.
4. A vent must be available at bottom of the control cabinet to form bottom-up air ow, which 
prevents heat island effect on the surface of components or partial thermal conductivity 
effect.
5. If the fan cannot meet the cooling requirements, install an air conditioner in the cabinet 
or in the equipment room. Note that the temperature inside the cabinet must not be too low; 
otherwise, condensation may occur, causing short-circuit of components.
6. For special environment where the temperature is high but cannot be reduced effectively, 
de-rate the controller during use.
3.1.3 Terminal Arrangement and Wiring Description
 
■
Terminal Arrangement
The following gure shows terminal arrangement of the NICE3000
new
.





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 36 -
Figure 3-3 Terminal arrangement of the NICE3000
new

CN5
CN12
 
PRG
UP
SET
J9
J10
COP
HOP
CAN2
232
CN1
CN9
J5
J1
CN3
CN2
CN7
CN4
J7
NICE3000
new 
integrated 
elevator controller
J12

 
■
Description of Main Circuit Terminals
The following gure shows main circuit terminal arrangement.
Figure 3-4 Main circuit terminal arrangement

R
S
T
PB
U
V
W
POWER MOTOR





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 37 -
Figure 3-5 Wiring of the main circuit

R
S
T
PB
U
V
W
POWER MOTOR
Three-phase 
power supply
Safety contactor
Braking resistor

(For models of below 37 kW)

Braking unit
R
S
T
PB
U
V
W
POWER
MOTOR
Three-phase AC 
power supply
Safety contactor
Braking resistor
MDBUN
Jumper bar

(For models of 37 kW and above)
Table 3-1 Description of main circuit terminals
Terminal Name Description
R, S, T
Three-phase power input 
terminals
Provide 380 VAC power supply.
(+), (-)
Positive and negative 
terminals of DC bus
Connect the external braking unit and energy 
feedback unit for models of 37 kW and above.
(+), PB
Connecting terminals of 
braking resistor
Connect the braking resistor for models of below 
37 kW.
U, V, W Controller output terminals Connect the three-phase motor.
Grounding terminal Must be grounded.





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 38 -
Precautions about wiring of the main circuit terminals are as follows:
1.  Select the braking resistor according to the recommended values in the braking resistor 
selection table.
2.  The circuit on the output side must not be short-circuited or grounded.
3.  U, V, W cables of the controller must pass through the grounding metal pipe and be laid 
separately or vertically with the control circuit signal cable.
4.  If the motor cable is too long, electrical resonance will be generated due to the impact 
of distributed capacitance, thus damaging the motor insulation or generating higher 
leakage current, causing the controller to trip in overcurrent protection.
5.  The grounding terminal of the main circuit must be well grounded with a thick and short 
cable. A multi-strand copper cable above 4 mm
2
 special for grounding is recommended, 
and the grounding resistance must not larger than 4 Ω. The grounding electrode cannot 
be shared with the power zero line.
 
■
Description of Control Circuit Terminals
Table 3-2 Description of control circuit terminals
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement
CN1
X1 to 
X16
DI
 
•
Input voltage range: 
10–30 VDC
 
•
Input impedance: 4.7 kΩ
 
•
Optocoupler isolation
 
•
Input current limit: 5 mA
Functions set in F5-01 to 
F5-24

X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
CN1
X16

  

X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
M
Ai
CN9

CN9
X17 to 
X24
DI
Ai/M AI
Used for the analog load 
cell device
CN3
24V/
COM
External 24 
VDC power 
supply
24 VDC power supply for 
the entire board

CN3
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
CAN+
CAN-

MOD+/-
RS485 
differential 
signal
Standard isolated RS485 
communication interface, 
used for hall call and 
display
CAN+/-
CANbus 
differential 
signal
CANbus communication 
interface, communication 
with the CTB
CN2
X25 to 
X27/
XCM
High-voltage 
detection 
terminal
Input voltage range: 110 
VAC±15%
Safety circuit and door lock 
circuit, function set in F5-37 
to F5-39

CN2
X25
X26
X27
XCM





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 39 -
Mark Code Terminal Name Function Description Terminal Arrangement
CN7
Y1/M1 
to
Y6/M6
Relay output
Normally-open (NO), 
maximum current and 
voltage rating: 5 A, 250 
VAC
Function set in F5-26 to F5-
31

CN7
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
Y4
M4
Y5
M5
Y6
M6

CN4 CAN2+/-
CAN2 
differential 
signal
CAN2 communication 
interface, used for group 
control or parallel control

CN4
CAN2+
CAN2-
GND

CN5
DB9 
interface
RS232 
communication 
interface
Used as the interface for 
commission software, 
cell monitoring, RS232/
RS485 parallel control, and 
software download for the 
MCB and drive board

5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
CN5

CN12
RJ45 
interface
Operation 
panel interface
Used to connect the LED 
or LCD operator

CN12

J1
Optional grounding terminal for AI. The pins marked with 
"COM" are connected to the ground.

J1
COM

J5
Used to connect the terminal resistor for the CANbus 
communication control board; the pins marked with "ON" 
are connected to the terminal resistor.

J5
ON

J7
Grounding terminal of the control board. If it is shorted, the 
ground of the control board is connected to the ground of 
the AC drive.

J7

J12 Interface for connecting the PG card

J12

J9/
J10
Factory reserved. Do not short them randomly. Otherwise, 
the controller may not be used properly.
-
Table 3-3 Description of indicators on the MCB
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
COP
CAN1 
communication 
indicator
When communication between the MCB and the CTB 
is normal, this indicator is on (green).
HOP
Modbus 
communication 
indicator
When communication between the MCB and the HCB 
is normal, this indicator is on (green).





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 40 -
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
CAN2
Group control 
communication 
indicator
This indicator is steady on (green) when communication 
for parallel control or group control is normal, and blinks 
when the running in parallel mode or group mode is 
normal.
232
Serial communication 
indicator
This indicator is on (green) when communication with 
the host computer or cell/remote monitoring board is 
normal.
X1 to X24 Input signal indicator This indicator is on when the external input is active.
Y1 to Y6
Output signal 
indicator
This indicator is on when the system output is active.
3.2 CTB Board (MCTC-CTB)
3.2.1 Dimensions and Installation
The car top board (MCTC-CTB) is the elevator car control board of the NICE3000
new
. It 
consists of 8 DI terminals, 1 AI terminal, and 9 relay output terminals (standard: 7). The 
following gures show the appearance and structure and installation method of the CTB.
Figure 3-6 Appearance and structure of the CTB
     

ON
J2
J9
CN2 CN1
CN6
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN10
CN7
CN8
MCTC-CTB
115
125
Φ4.9
A1B1B2B3C2 C1D2 D1 C3
X1
X2 X3
X4 X5
X6 X7
X8
CAN
RESET
D2
D1
DM
C3
C3M
C2
C1
CM
B3
B2
B1
BM
AM
B
A
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
Ai
M
24V
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
P24
P24
152
162
OFF
Unit: mm

Figure 3-7 Installation method of the CTB (unit: mm)

Self-tapping 
screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Plastic support not lower 
than 1 cm
Fixing 
backplane
MCTC-CTB

  

Self-tapping 
screws
4-Φ4.9×30
Car top 
control box
MCTC-CTB
Plastic support 
higher than 1 cm





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 41 -
3.2.2 Wiring of CTB Terminals
Table 3-4 Wiring description of CTB terminals
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
Terminal 
Arrangement
CN2
+24V/COM
External 24 VDC 
power supply
24 VDC power supply for 
the entire CTB

CN2
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM

CAN+/CAN-
CANbus 
communication 
interface
Connecting the MCB for 
CANbus communication
CN1 
+24V/COM
24 VDC power 
supply
24 VDC power supply for 
the HCB

CN1
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM

MOD+/MOD-
Modbus 
communication
Connecting the HCB for 
Modbus communication
CN6 Ai-M
Load cell signal 
input
0–10 VDC

CN6
Ai
M
24V

CN3 
P24
24 VDC power 
supply
DI common terminal

CN3
X
1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
P24
P24

X1 Light curtain 1
DI terminal
1. Photocoupler isolation, 
unipolarity input
2. Input impedance: 3.3 
kΩ 
Signals of the CTB are 
active when there is 24 
VDC power supply.
X2 Light curtain 2
X3 Door open limit 1
X4 Door open limit 2
X5 Door close limit 1
X6 Door close limit 2
X7
Full-load signal 
(100%)
X8
Overload signal 
(110%)





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 42 -
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
Terminal 
Arrangement
CN4 
B1-BM Door open signal 1
Relay output terminal
Contact drive capacity: 
30 VDC, 1 A

CN4
D2
D1
DM
C3
C3M
C2
C1
CM
B3
B2
B1
BM

B2-BM Door close signal 1
B3-BM Forced door close 1
C1-CM Door open signal 2
C2-CM Door close signal 2
C3-C3M Forced door close 2
D1-DM Up arrival signal
D2-DM Down arrival signal
CN5
A-AM (NC 
contact)
B-AM (NO 
contact)
Car fan and lamp 
control
Relay output terminal
Contact drive capacity: 
250 VAC, 3 A or 30 VDC, 
1 A

CN5
A
B
AM

CN7/CN8
DB9-pin port for 
communication with 
the CCB
Connecting the CCB

1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
CN7/CN8

CN10 RJ45 interface
Connecting the external 
operation panel

CN10

J2
CTB address 
jumper in parallel 
control
Setting the CTB 
addresses: Short OFF 
or do not connect the 
terminal for a single 
elevator or the master 
elevator in parallel 
control; short ON for the 
slave elevator in parallel 
control.

J2
ON
OFF





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 43 -
Mark Terminal Name Function Description
Terminal 
Arrangement
CAN
CANbus 
communication 
indicator
This indicator blinks when 
communication between 
the CTB and the MCB is 
normal, and is steady on 
when a communication 
fault occurs. 

CAN
RESET

Reset
CANbus 
communication fault 
indicator
This indicator blinks 
and the CANbus 
communication indicator 
is steady on when a 
fault occurs during 
communication between 
the CTB and the MCB.
X1 to X8 DI indicator
This indicator is on 
(green) when the external 
input is active.

X1
X2 X3
X4
X5
X6 X7
X8

A1 to D2
Relay output 
indicator
This indicator is on 
(green) when the system 
output is active.

B1B2B3
C2
C1
D2 D1 C3
A1

J9 Reserved
It is factory reserved. 
Do not short it randomly. 
Otherwise, the controller 
may not be used properly.
-

Note

 
•
To prevent external interference on the communication, you are advised to use the shielded 
twisted pair as communication cables and lay them parallel.
 
•
Connect cables to the terminals according to the terminal marks, and x the cables.
3.3 Display Board (MCTC-HCB)
As an important interface between users and the control system, the MCTC-HCB receives 
hall calls and displays the current oor and running direction for the hall. This board can also 
be used as car display board.
Monarch provides many types of display boards. The following part describes only a 
few common types. If the types available cannot meet your requirements, you can use a 
parallel-serial conversion board to make the board provided match your own. For any further 
requirement, contact Monarch.
The common types to be described are listed in the following table.





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 44 -
Table 3-5 Common HCB types
Name Feature Size (mm)
HCB-H Dot-matrix display board (red) 144 x 70 x 18
HCB-R1
Ultrathin dot-matrix display board (red)
144 x 70 x 10
HCB-D2
Ultrathin segment LCD display board (blue 
background white display)
144 x 70 x 10
HCB-U1
4.3-inch segment LCD display board (blue 
background white display)
143.5 x 79.2 x 9.4
HCB-V1
6.4-inch segment LCD display board (blue 
background white display)
131 x 184.6 x 14.2
3.3.1 HCB-H (Dot-Matrix Display Board)
The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-H.
Figure 3-8 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-H
 

4-
Φ
4.2
56.0
134.0
70.0
144.0
22.9
39.1
34.3
22.9
S1
CN1
JP1 JP2
JP3 JP4
UP
DOWN
MCTC-HCB-H
Unit: mm

The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-H.
Figure 3-9 Installation method of HCB-H

9.9
22.5
Dot-matrix 
display board
HCB-H
Self-tapping 
screw
4-
Φ
4.9x30
Plastic 
support higher 
than 1 cm





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 45 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-H.
Table 3-6 Input and output terminals of HCB-H
Terminal 
Name
Function Terminal Wiring
JP1
Interface for the elevator lock switch and up arrival 
indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are output of the up arrival indicator 
(24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Elevator 
lock switch 
input
Up arrival 
indicator

JP2
Interface for the re emergency switch and down 
arrival indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for switch input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are output of the down arrival 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Fire 
emergency 
switch input
Down arrival 
indicator

JP3
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Up call indicator
Up call 
button

JP4
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
Down call 
button

S1
Button for setting the oor address.
Hold down the button to adjust the oor address 
(range 0–56). After you stop pressing, the address 
number blinks three times and the setting is 
successful. 

S1





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 46 -
Terminal 
Name
Function Terminal Wiring
CN1
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. 
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.

1 2 3 4
MOD
-
MOD+
24V
COM

3.3.2 HCB-R1 (Ultrathin Dot-Matrix Display Board)
The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-R1.
Figure 3-10 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-R1

4-Φ3.5
56.0
134.0
144.0
22.8
39.0
CN1
J1
UP DOWN ST XF
70
MCTC-HCB-R1
Unit: mm

The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-R1.
Figure 3-11 Installation method of HCB-R1

6.7
Ultrathin dot-
matrix display 
board
HCB-R1
Self-tapping 
screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Plastic support 
higher than 1 cm
10





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 47 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals.
Table 3-7 Input and output terminals of HCB-R1
Terminal 
Name
Function Terminal Wiring
UP
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Up call indicator
Up call 
button

DOWN
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
Down call 
button

XF/ST
Interface for the re emergency and elevator lock 
switches
Pins 1 and 2 are for re emergency input. 
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.

1 2 3 4
Fire 
emergency 
input
Elevator 
lock 
input

J1
Terminal for setting the oor address.
Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN button 
to set the oor address (range 0–56). After the 
jumper cap is removed, the address is automatically 
stored.

J1

CN1
Modbus communication and power supply terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. 
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.

1 2 3 4
MOD-
MOD+
24V
COM





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 48 -
3.3.3 HCB-D2 (Ultrathin Segment LED Display Board)
The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-D2.
Figure 3-12 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-D2

4-Φ3.5
56.0
134.0
70.0
144.0
76.0
49
CN1
J1
UP DOWN ST XF
Unit: mm

The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-D2.
Figure 3-13 Installation method of HCB-D2

HCB-D2
Self-tapping 
Screw
4-
Φ4.9x30
Plastic support 
higher than 1 cm
10





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 49 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-D2.
Table 3-8 Input and output terminals of HCB-D2
Terminal 
Name
Function Terminal Wiring
UP
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Up call indicator
Up call 
button

DOWN
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down call 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
Down call 
button

XF/ST
Interface for the re emergency and elevator 
lock switch
Pins 1 and 2 are for re emergency input. 
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.

1 2 3 4
Fire 
emergency 
input
Elevator 
lock input

J1
Terminal for setting the oor address
Short J1, and press the UP button or DOWN 
button to set the oor address (range 0–56). 
After the jumper cap is removed, the address is 
automatically stored.

J1

CN1
Modbus communication and power supply 
terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication.
Pins 1 and 4 are for power supply.

1 2 3 4
MOD-
MOD
+
24V
COM





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 50 -
3.3.4 HCB-U1 (4.3-inch Segment LED Display Board)
The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-U1.
Figure 3-14 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-U1
     

3-5.5
3-4.5
Φ
4.5
143.5
79.2
118.0
60.0
53.0
92.0
Unit: mm

The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-U1.
Figure 3-15 Installation method of HCB-U1

9.4
15
HCB-U1
Self-tapping 
screw
4-
Φ
4.9x30
Plastic support 
higher than 1 cm





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 51 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-U1.
Table 3-9 Input and output terminals of HCB-U1
Terminal 
Name
Function Terminal Wiring
J1
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 
mA).

1 2 3 4
Up call indicator
Up call 
button

J2
Interface for the down call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down 
call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 
mA).

1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
Down call 
button

J3
Interface for the re emergency and elevator 
lock switches
Pins 1 and 2 are for re emergency input. 
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.

1 2 3 4
Fire 
emergency 
input
Elevator 
lock input

S1
Button for setting the oor address.
Hold down the button to adjust the oor 
address (range: 0−56). After you stop pressing, 
the address number blinks three times, and 
therefore the setting is successful.

S1

CN1
Modbus communication and power supply 
terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. 
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.

1 2 3 4
MOD-
MOD+
24V
COM





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 52 -
3.3.5 HCB-V1 (6.4-inch Segment LED Display Board)
The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of HCB-V1.
Figure 3-16 Appearance and dimensions of HCB-V1
     

 
184.6
131
160
105
95
135
Φ
4.5
Unit: mm

The following gure shows the installation method of HCB-V1.
Figure 3-17 Installation method of HCB-V1

17.9
14.2
HCB-V1
Self-tapping 
screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Plastic support 
higher than 1 cm





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 53 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of HCB-V1.
Table 3-10 Input and output terminals of HCB-V1
Terminal Name Function Terminal Wiring
J1
Interface for the up call button and indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for up call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the up call 
indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 40 
mA).

1 2 3 4
Up call indicator
Up call 
button

J2
Interface for the down call button and 
indicator
Pins 2 and 3 are for down call input. 
Pins 1 and 4 are power supply for the down 
call indicator (24 VDC output, load capacity: 
40 mA).

1 2 3 4
Down call indicator
Down call 
button

J3
Interface for the re emergency and elevator 
lock switch
Pins 1 and 2 are for re emergency input. 
Pins 3 and 4 are for elevator lock input.

1 2 3 4
Fire 
emergency 
input
Elevator 
lock 
input

S1
Button for setting the oor address.
Hold down the button to adjust the oor 
address (range: 0−56). After you stop 
pressing, the address number blinks three 
times, and therefore the setting is successful.

S1

CN1
Modbus communication and power supply 
terminal
Pins 2 and 3 are for Modbus communication. 
Pins 1 and 4 are for DC power supply.

1 2 3 4
MOD-
MOD+
24V
COM

3.4 CCB Board (MCTC-CCB)
The car call board (MCTC-CCB) is another interface between users and the control 
system. Each CCB comprises 24 inputs and  22 outputs,  including 16 oor buttons and 8 
functional signals. The CCB mainly collects button calls and outputs signals of the button 
call indicators. The need for 31-oor use can be implemented through cascaded connection. 
CN2 is an input connector and CN1 is a cascaded output connector.
The following gure shows the appearance and dimensions of MCTC-CCB.





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 54 -
Figure 3-18 Appearance and dimensions of MCTC-CCB

 
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2
3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4
JP1 JP2 JP3
JP4
JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8
JP9 JP10 JP11 JP12
JP13 JP14 JP15 JP16
JP17 JP18 JP19 JP20
JP21 JP22 JP23 JP24
CN1
Buzzer
Floor 1 Floor 2 Floor 3 Floor 4
Floor 5 Floor 6 Floor 7 Floor 8
Floor 9 Floor 10 Floor 11 Floor 12
Floor 13 Floor 14 Floor 15 Floor 16
Attendant
Direction 
change
Independent 
running
Fire 
emergency
Door 
open
Door 
close
Door open 
delay
Bypass
79 mm
69 mm
158 mm
148 mm
MCTC-CCB
CN2
R2.5

The following gure shows the installation method of MCTC-CCB.
Figure 3-19 Installation method of MCTC-CCB

MCTC-CCB
Self-tapping 
screw
4-Φ4.9x30
Plastic support 
higher than 1 cm





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 55 -
The following table describes the input and output terminals of MCTC-CCB.
Table 3-11 Input and output terminals of MCTC-CCB
No. Interface Pins 2 and 3 Pins 1 and 4 Remarks
1 JP1 Floor 1 button input Floor 1 display output

1 2 3 4
Floor button indicator
Floor 
button

For CCB2, the 
input signal of JPn 
corresponds to oor 
(16+n) button input.
2 JP2 Floor 2 button input Floor 2 display output
3 JP3 Floor 3 button input Floor 3 display output
4 JP4 Floor 4 button input Floor 4 display output
5 JP5 Floor 5 button input Floor 5 display output
6 JP6 Floor 6 button input Floor 6 display output
7 JP7 Floor 7 button input Floor 7 display output
8 JP8 Floor 8 button input Floor 8 display output
9 JP9 Floor 9 button input Floor 9 display output
10 JP10 Floor 10 button input Floor 10 display output
11 JP11 Floor 11 button input Floor 11 display output
12 JP12 Floor 12 button input Floor 12 display output
13 JP13 Floor 13 button input Floor 13 display output
14 JP14 Floor 14 button input Floor 14 display output
15 JP15 Floor 15 button input Floor 15 display output
16 JP16 Floor 16 button input Floor 16 display output
17 JP17
Door open button 
input
Door open display 
output
Invalid for CCB 2.
18 JP18
Door close button 
input
Door close display 
output
19 JP19
Door open delay 
button input
Door open delay 
display output
20 JP20 Bypass input Bypass display output
21 JP21 Attendant input Reserved
22 JP22
Direction change 
input
Reserved
23 JP23
Independent running 
input
Reserved
24 JP24 Fireghter input Reserved
Note: Pins 1 and 2 are positive of power supply. The pin with white dot mark or that is 
rectangular is pin 1.

Note

 
•
Perform wiring strictly according to the terminal marks and ensure that the button is inserted 
securely.
 
•
Because the MCTC-CCB has the same interface, do not make wrong connection when 
connecting multiple boards in series.





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 56 -
3.5 Selection and Use of the MCTC-PG Card
The NICE3000
new
 can implement CLVC only with use of the MCTC-PG card. The following 
figures show the appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller. 
Directly insert the J1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card into the J12 terminal of the controller.
Figure 3-20 Appearance of the MCTC-PG card and its installation on the controller
        

 
PRG
UP
SET
NICE3000
new
series integrated 
elevator controller
J12
J1
MCTC-PG 
card
CN1

3.5.1 Selection of the MCTC-PG Card
Monarch provides four PG card models, MCTC-PG-A2, MCTC-PG-D, MCTC-PG-E and 
MCTC-PG-F1 for different encoder types, as described in the following table.
Table 3-12 Selection of the MCTC-PG card models
Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance and Dimension
 
•
Push-pull encoder
 
•
open-collector 
incremental 
encoder
MCTC-PG-A2

12
V
PGM
PGA
PGB
MCTC-PG-A2
J1
J2

UVW encoder MCTC-PG-D

J1
MCTC-PG-D
CN1
D2
D5
D8
D11
D14
M AI
CN2





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 57 -
Encoder Type Adaptable PG Card Appearance and Dimension
SIN/COS encoder MCTC-PG-E

J1
MCTC-PG-E
CN1

Absolute encoder 
(ECN413/1313)
MCTC-PG-F1

J1
MCTC-PG-F1
CN1

3.5.2 Terminal Wiring and Description of the MCTC-PG Card
The MCTC-PG card is connected to the controller and the encoder as follows:
The J1 terminal and CN1 terminal of the MCTC-PG card are respectively connected to the 
J12 terminal of the MCB on the controller and the encoder of the motor.
Different MCTC-PG card models are connected to the MCB in the same way. The 
connection method to the encoder depends on the CN1 terminal of the model.
The following gure shows the wiring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller.
Figure 3-21 Wring between MCTC-PG-E and the controller

ON
J2
J9
CN2 CN1
CN6
CN3
CN4
CN5
CN10
CN7
CN8
MCTC-CTB
115
125
Φ4.9
A1B1B2B3C2 C1D2 D1 C3
X1
X2 X3
X4 X5
X6 X7
X8
CAN
RESET
D2
D1
DM
C3
C3M
C2
C1
CM
B3
B2
B1
BM
AM
B
A
24V
CAN+
CAN-
CO
M
24V
MOD+
MOD-
CO
M
Ai
M
24V
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
P24
P24
152
162
OFF
Unit: mm

The following table denes the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models.
Table 3-13 Denitions of the CN1 terminals of different MCTC-PG card models
MCTC-PG-A2 MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1
1 12V 1 A+ 6 NC 11 W+ 1 B- 6 A- 11 C- 1 DT+ 6 GND 11 B+
2 PGM 2 A- 7 U+ 12 W- 2 NC 7 COM 12 D+ 2 DT- 7 U5V 12 B-
3 PGA 3 B+ 8 U- 13 VCC 3 Z+ 8 B+ 13 D- 3 CK+ 8 GND 13





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 58 -
MCTC-PG-A2 MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1
4 PGB 4 B- 9 V+ 14 COM 4 Z- 9 VCC 14 NC 4 CK- 9 A+ 14
5 NC 10 V- 15 NC 5 A+ 10 C+ 15 NC 5 5V 10 A- 15

12V
PGM
PGA
PGB

CN1

1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
13
14
15

CN1

1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
13
14
15

CN1

1
2
3
4
5
9
10
11
12
6
7
8
13
14
15

CN1
3.5.3 Precautions on Connecting the MCTC-PG Card
1.  The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be separated from the cables of 
the control circuit and the power circuit. Parallel cabling in close distance is forbidden.
2.  The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must be a shielded cable. The shield 
must be connected to the PE on the controller side. To minimize interference, single-end 
grounding is suggested.
3.  The cable from the MCTC-PG card to the encoder must run through the duct separately 
and the metal shell is reliably grounded.
3.5.4 Selection of Adaptable Motor
The main counters of the electrical relationship between the controller and the motor are 
voltage and current.
1.  In general elevator applications, the input mains voltage is 380 V, and the motor voltage 
can only be equal to or smaller than 380 V. Thus, when selecting the NICE3000
new
, you 
can take only the current of the motor into consideration.
2.  When the NICE3000
new
 is designed, large safety allowance is reserved for the main 
power module. The controller can run properly within 1.1 times of the nominal output 
current. During stable running, the maximum output torque is 150% of the rated torque 
and can reach up to 200% of the rated torque for a short time.
Therefore, for the motor with the rated voltage of 380 V, you can select the controller of the 
same power class. As long as the rated current of the motor is smaller than 1.1 times of the 
output current of the controller, the controller of the same power class can also be used.
Generally speaking, when selecting an adaptable motor, ensure that the rated current 
of the motor is equal to or smaller than the output current of the controller. For technical 
specications of the controller, see section 2.3.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 59 -
3.6 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices
3.6.1 Description of Peripheral Electrical Devices
1.  Do not install the capacitor or surge suppressor on the output side of the controller. 
Otherwise, it may cause faults to the controller or damage to the capacitor and surge 
suppressor.
2.  Inputs/Outputs (main circuit) of the controller contain harmonics, which may interfere 
with the communication device connected to the controller. Therefore, install an anti-
interference lter to minimize the interference.
3.  Select the peripheral devices based on actual applications as well as by referring to 
section 3.6.2.
The following table describes the peripheral electrical devices.
Table 3-14 Description of peripheral electrical devices
Part Mounting Location Function Description
MCCB
Forefront of controller 
power input side
Cut off the power supply of the controller and 
provide short-circuit protection.
Safety 
contactor
Between MCCB and the 
controller input side
Apply/Cut off the power supply of the controller.
The close/open of the contactor is controlled by the 
external safety circuit.
AC input 
reactor
Controller input side
Improve the power factor of the input side.
Eliminate the higher harmonics on the input side to 
provide effective protection on the rectier bridge. 
Eliminate the input current unbalance due to 
unbalance between the power phases.
AC 
output 
reactor
Between the controller 
output side and the motor, 
close to the controller
If the distance between the controller and the 
motor is greater than 100 m, install an AC output 
reactor.
3.6.1 Selection of Peripheral Electrical Devices
Proper cable specification and cabling greatly improves anti-interference capability and 
safety of the system, facilitating installation and commissioning and enhancing system 
running stability.
The following table describes the specications of peripheral electrical devices for selection.
Table 3-15 Specication of peripheral electrical devices for selection
Controller 
Model
MCCB (A)
Contactor 
(A)
Cable of Main 
Circuit (mm²)
Cable of Control 
Circuit (mm²)
Grounding 
Cable (mm²)
NICE-2002
16 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE-2003
25 25 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE-4002
10 12 2.5 0.75 2.5





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 60 -
Controller 
Model
MCCB (A)
Contactor 
(A)
Cable of Main 
Circuit (mm²)
Cable of Control 
Circuit (mm²)
Grounding 
Cable (mm²)
NICE-4003
16 18 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE-4005
20 25 2.5 0.75 2.5
NICE -4007
25 25 4 0.75 4
NICE -4011
32 32 4 0.75 4
NICE-4015
40 40 6 0.75 6
NICE-4018
50 50 10 1 10
NICE-4022
50 50 10 1 10
NICE-4030
65 65 16 1 16
NICE-4037 80 80 25 1 16
NICE-4045
100 115 35 1 16
NICE-4055 125 125 50 1 25

Note

To prevent the strong power from interfering with the weak power, the strong-power cables must 
be separated from the weak-power cables during cabling in the shaft. Grounding cables must be 
used to separate strong-power and weak-power traveling cables. "Strong power" refers to the 
voltage of 36 V and above.
3.7 Electrical Wiring Diagram of the NICE3000
new
 Control System
Figure 3-22 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE3000
new
 control system
See the last page of this chapter.
3.8 Installation of Shaft Position Signals
In elevator control, to implement landing accurately and running safely, car position needs to 
be identied based on shaft position signals. 
These shaft position signals include the leveling switches, up/down slow-down switches, up/
down limit switches, and up/down nal limit switches.
These shaft position signals are directly transmitted by the shaft cables to the MCB of the 
controller. For the electrical wiring method, refer to Figure 3-22.
The following gure shows the arrangement of shaft position signals in the shaft.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 61 -
Figure 3-23 Arrangement of shaft position signals

Leveling flag
(floor N)
L
80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm
150 mm
L >
2 x F3-08
V²
Top leveling 
position
D
L L >
2 x F3-08
V²
150 mm
Up final limit 
switch
Up limit 
switch
30-50 mm
(V: Rated 
elevator speed)
Up slow-down switch
Down slow-down switch
Bottom leveling 
position
(V: Rated 
elevator speed)
Down limit 
switch
Down final 
limit switch
30─50 mm

Leveling flag
(floor N)
L
80 ≤ D ≤ 200 mm
150 mm
L >
2 x F3-08
V²
Top leveling 
position
D
L L >
2 x F3-08
V²
150 mm
Up final limit 
switch
Up limit 
switch
30-50 mm
(V: Rated 
elevator speed)
Up slow-down switch
Down slow-down switch
Bottom leveling 
position
(V: Rated 
elevator speed)
Down limit 
switch
Down final 
limit switch
30─50 mm

3.8.1 Installation of Leveling Signals
Leveling signals comprise the leveling switch and leveling plate and is directly connected 
to the input terminal of the controller. It is used to enable the car to land at each floor 
accurately.
The leveling switches are generally installed on the top of the car. The NICE3000
new
 system 
supports the installation of 1−3 leveling switches. The leveling plate is installed on the guide 
rail in the shaft. A leveling plate needs to be installed at each floor. Ensure that leveling 
plates at all oors are mounted with the same depth and verticality.
The following gure shows the installation of leveling signals





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 62 -
Figure 3-24 Installation of leveling signals

Car
Door zone signal 
detection
Down leveling signal 
detection
Up leveling signal 
detection
Leveling flag
Leveling 
switch

The following table describes the installation requirements of leveling switches
Table 3-16 Installation requirements of leveling switches
Number of 
Leveling 
Switches
Installation Method
Connecting to Input Terminals of 
Controller
Setting of 
Function Code
1

Door zone 
signal detection

X1
X2
X3
+24 VDC
Door zone 
signal

F5-01 = 0
F5-02 = 35 (NC)
F5-03 = 0

X1
X
2
X3
+24 VDC
Door zone 
signal

F5-01 = 0
F5-02 = 03 (NO)
F5-03 = 0
2

Up leveling 
signal detection
Down leveling 
signal detection

X1
X2
X3
+24 VDC
Up leveling
Down leveling

F5-01 = 33 (NC)
F5-02 = 0
F5-03 = 34 (NC)

Down leveling
Up leveling
X1
X2
X3
+24 VDC

F5-01 = 01 (NO)
F5-02 = 0
F5-03 = 02 (NO)





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                            Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                   

- 63 -
Number of 
Leveling 
Switches
Installation Method
Connecting to Input Terminals of 
Controller
Setting of 
Function Code
3

Door zone 
signal detection
Up leveling 
signal detection
Down leveling 
signal detection

Up leveling
X1
X
2
X3
+24 VDC
Door zone signal
Down leveling

F5-01 = 33 (NC)
F5-02 = 35 (NC)
F5-03 = 34 (NC)

Down leveling
Up leveling
X1
X2
X3
+24 VDC
Door zone signal

F5-01 = 01 (NO)
F5-02 = 03 (NO)
F5-03 = 02 (NO)

Note

 
•
When installing leveling plates, ensure that plates at all oors are mounted with the same depth 
and verticality. Otherwise, the leveling accuracy will be affected. The recommended length of 
the ag is 80–200 mm.
 
•
More leveling input signals need to be added if the door pre-open function is used. In this case, 
you need to increase the length of the plate properly. For details on the door pre-open module, 
contact Monarch or local agent.
3.8.2 Installation of Slow-Down Switches
The slow-down switch is one of the key protective components of the NICE3000
new
, 
protecting the elevator from over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal at 
maximum speed when the elevator position becomes abnormal.
The NICE3000
new
 system supports a maximum of three pairs of slow-down switches. The 
slow-down switch 1, slow-down switch 2 and slow-down switch 3 are installed from the 
two ends of the shaft to the middle oor one by one. Generally, only one pair of slow-down 
switches is required for the low-speed elevator. Two or three pairs of slow-down switches 
are required for the high-speed elevator.
The slow-down distance L indicates the distance from the slow-down switch to the leveling 
plate at the terminal oor. The calculating formula is as follows:

L >
2 x F3-08
V²

In the formula, L indicates the slow-down distance, V indicates the F0-04 (Rated elevator 
speed), and F3-08 indicates the special deceleration rate.
The default value of F3-08 (Special deceleration rate) is 0.9 m/s
2
. The slow-down distances 
calculated based on different rated elevator speeds are listed in the following table:





Mechanical and Electrical Installation                                                            NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 64 -
Table 3-17 Slow-down distances based on different rated elevator speeds
Rated Elevator Speed V ≤ 1.5 m/s 1.5 m/s < V ≤ 2.4 m/s 2.4 m/s < V ≤ 3.7 m/s
Distance of slow-down 1 1.3 m to H/2 1.3 m 1.3 m
Distance of slow-down 2 - 3.2 m 3.2 m
Distance of slow-down 3 - - 8.0 m

Note

 
•
"H" in the table indicates the landing height. The slow-down 1 will reset the terminal oor 
display, and the slow-down 1 switch needs to be installed within H/2.
 
•
The slow-down distances above are calculated on the basis of the default values (special 
deceleration rate 0.9 m/s
2
, and acceleration rate and deceleration rate 0.6 m/s
2
).
 
•
Increasing the acceleration rate and deceleration rate or reducing the special deceleration rate 
may bring safety hazard. If any change is need, re-calculate the slow-down distance by using 
the above formula.
3.8.3 Installation of Limit Switches
The up limit switch and down limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/
bottom terminal when the elevator does not stop at the leveling position of the terminal oor.
 
•
The up limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the top leveling position. 
The limit  switch acts when  the car continues  to run upward  30−50 mm from  the top 
leveling position.
 
•
The down limit switch needs to be installed 30−50 mm away from the bottom leveling 
position. The limit switch acts when the car continues to run downward 30−50 mm from 
the bottom leveling position.
3.8.4 Installation of Final Limit Switches
The nal limit switch is to protect the elevator from over travel top/bottom terminal when the 
elevator does not stop completely upon passing the up/down limit switch.
 
•
The up nal limit switch is mounted above the up limit switch. It is usually 150 mm away 
from the top leveling position.
 
•
The down nal limit switch is mounted below the down limit switch. It is usually 150 mm 
away from the bottom leveling position.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                 
                                                                                                                                                                                                                                         
Mechanical and Electrical Installation
  

Figure 3-22 Electrical wiring diagram of the NICE3000new control system

Up slow-down switch 1
Down leveling
RUN contactor feedback
Safety circuit feedback
Door lock circuit feedback
Brake contactor feedback
Up leveling
Inspection signal
Inspection up
Inspection down
Up limit
Down limit
NICE3000
new
CN1
CN9
CN3
CN2
CN7
CN4
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
X10
X11
X12
X13
X14
X15
X16
X17
X18
X19
X20
X21
X22
X23
X24
M
Ai
X25
X26
X27
XCOM
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
Y4
M4
Y5
M5
Y6
M6
CAN2+
CAN2-
GND
CN5
R
S
T
Three-phase 
AC power 
supply
Safety 
contactor
M
 
PRG UP SET
Braking resistor
+
– PB
U
V
W
J12
Encoder
Motor
CN1
CN3
CN10
MCTC-CTB
24V
MOD+
MOD-
COM
MCTC-CCBMCTC-CCB
CN8
CN7
CN2
CN2
CN1
CN1
Cascaded connection
24V
COM
CAN+
CAN-
MOD+
MOD-
CN2
24 V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
D2
D1
DM
C3
C3M
C2
C1
CM
B3
B2
B1
BM
MCTC-HCB
Car display
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
MCTC-HCB
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
MF.K
RUN
STOP
RES
QUICK
PRG ENTER
RUN
LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
RPM
%
A VHz
CN12
+24 VDC
Down slow-down switch 1
Up slow-down switch 2
Down slow-down switch 2
Up slow-down switch 3
Down slow-down switch 3
Analog load 
cell signal
Inspection 
circuit
Inspection 
signal
Inspection 1
Inspection down
X9
X10
X11
+24 VDC
Inspection 1 
common
Up
Down
Inspection up
Door 2 light curtain
Door 2 open limit
Overload signal
Door 1 open limit
Door 1 close limit
Full-load signal
Door 2 close limit
Door 1 light curtain
USB
24V
0V
A
B
M
C
T
C
-
C
H
M
(
v
o
i
c
e
 
a
n
n
o
u
n
c
e
m
e
n
t
)
CN4
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
P24
P24
J1
J2
J3
Arrival gong
Control of front door machine
CN1
MCTC-HCB
CN1
A
B
AM
CN5
Car lamp/fan 
control
CN6
 
Wiring for an 
analog load 
cell device
Top floor
Bottom 
floor
MCTC-PG
PG card
Braking 
mechanism
Shield
K1
K2
K1
K2
Note: The cables for connecting the 
MCTC-CCB are provided by Monarch and 
the model is MCTC-CCL. Specify it in 
your order.
Traveling cable
Door zone
Control of back door machine
Inspection 2
Up
Down
Inspection 
circuit
24V
Ai
M
Hall operation 
box
Car
Note: The functions of I/O terminals of the 
controller are set in group F5. The wiring 
in this figure uses the default setting.





4
Use of the 
NICE3000
new
   





Use of the NICE3000
new
                                                                                      NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 66 -
Chapter 4 Use of the NICE3000
new
The NICE3000
new
 supports four commissioning tools, 3-button keypad on the MCB, LED 
operation panel, LCD operator, and host computer monitoring software.
Tool Function Description Remark
Onboard 3-button keypad 
It is used to enter the shaft commissioning 
commands and view oor information.
Standard
LED operation panel
It is used to view and modify parameters related 
to elevator drive and control.
Optional
LCD operator
It is used to view parameters related to elevator 
drive and control in diagram and text, and modify 
and copy these parameters.
Optional
Host computer monitoring 
software
It is used to monitor the current elevator state, 
view and modify all parameters, and upload and 
download parameters on the PC.
Optional
The following part describes the commonly used keypad, LED operation panel, and LCD 
operator in detail.
4.1 Use of the Onboard Keypad
The onboard keypad consists of three 7-segment LEDs and three buttons. You can view 
information about the controller and enter simple commands on the keypad.

Note

The keypad is exposed, and pay attentions to the following points during use:
1. Wear insulated gloves when performing operations on the keypad to prevent electric shock or 
damage to the controller components due to electrostatic discharge.
2. Do not use a metal or sharp tool to press the button to prevent the short-circuit fault or damage 
to the components on the MCB.
The following gure shows the appearance of the keypad.
Figure 4-1 Appearance of the keypad

 
PRG UP SET
3 2 1
A
B
C
DP
D
E
F
G

As shown in the preceding gure, the three buttons are PRG, UP, and SET. The functions of 
the three buttons are as follows:
 
•
PRG: Press this button in any state to display the current function group number. 
You can press the UP button to change the function group number.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                      Use of the NICE3000
new

- 67 -
 
•
UP: Press this button to increase the function group number. 
Currently, the MCB denes a total of 13 function code groups, namely, F0 to F9, and 
FA to FC. You can press the UP button to display them in turn. In addition, in special 
function code group menu, you can input simple references by using the UP button.
 
•
SET: In the function code group menu, press this button to enter the menu of the 
function code group. 
In special function code group menu, after you input a simple reference and press this 
button to save the setting, the display will return to the F0 menu by default.
The following gure shows the setting of increasing the called oor to 5.
Figure 4-2 Setting the called oor

05
F0
04
(Select the function 
code group) 
(Set the 
parameter value)
Level-I menu
Level-II menu
PRG
Without 
saving
SET
Saving
When there is a blinking digit, 
press the UP button to modify it.
01
SET
Enter
Current floor
UP
Increase
(default display)
F1
PRG
Switch
UP
Increase

The function code groups displayed on the keypad are described as follows:
1.  F0: display of oor and running direction
The F0 menu is displayed on the keypad by default upon power-on. The rst 7-segment 
LED indicates the running direction, while the last two 7-segment LEDs indicate the 
current oor number of the elevator. 
When the  elevator stops,  the rst  7-segment LED has no display. When the elevator 
runs, the rst 7-segment LED blinks to indicate the running direction. 
When a system fault occurs, the 7-segment LEDs automatically display the fault code 
and blink. If the fault is reset automatically, the F0 menu is displayed.
2.  F1: command input of the running oor
After you enter the F1 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the bottom oor (F6-01). You 
can press the UP button to set the destination oor within the range of lowest to top and 
then press the SET button to save the setting. The elevator runs to the destination oor, 
and the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu at the same time.
3.  F2: fault reset and fault code display
After you enter the F2  menu, the 7-segment LEDs display  "0". You can press the UP 
button to change the setting to 1 or 2.
 ־ Display "1": If you select this value and press the SET button, the system fault is reset. 
Then, the display automatically switches over to the F0 menu.
 ־ Display "2":  If you select  this  value and press  the SET button, the  7-segment  LEDs 
display the 11 fault codes and occurrence time circularly. You can press the PRG button 
to exit.





Use of the NICE3000
new
                                                                                      NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 68 -
4.  F3: time display
After you enter the F3 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the current system time 
circularly.
5.  F4: contract number display
After you enter the F4 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the user’s contract number.
6.  F5: running times display
After you enter the F5 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the elevator running times 
circularly.
7.  F6: door open/close control
After you enter the F6 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "1-1", and the UP and SET 
buttons respectively stand for the door open button and door close button. You can 
press the PRG button to exit.
8.  F7: shaft auto-tuning command input
After you enter the F7 menu, the 7-segment LEDs  display "0". You can select 0 or 1 
here, where "1" indicates the shaft auto-tuning command available. 
After you select  "1" and press the SET button, shaft auto-tuning is implemented if the 
conditions are met. Meanwhile, the display switches over to the F0 menu. After shaft 
auto-tuning is complete, F7 is back to "0" automatically. If shaft auto-tuning conditions 
are not met, fault code "Err35" is displayed.
9.  F8: test function
After you enter the F8 menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting range of F8 is 
1–4, described as follows:
 ־ 1: Hall call forbidden
 ־ 2: Door open forbidden
 ־ 3: Overload forbidden
 ־ 4: Limit switches disabled
After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display 
"Err88" and blink, prompting that the elevator is being tested. When you press PRG to 
exit, F8 is back to 0 automatically.
10. F9: reserved
11.  FA: auto-tuning
After you enter the FA menu, the 7-segment LEDs display "0". The setting range of FA is 
1 and 2, as follows:
 ־ 1: With-load auto-tuning
 ־ 2: No-load auto-tuning
After the setting is complete, press the SET button. Then the 7-segment LEDs display 
"TUNE", and the elevator enters the auto-tuning state. After conrming that the elevator 
meets the safe running conditions, press the SET button again to start auto-tuning.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                      Use of the NICE3000
new

- 69 -
After auto-tuning is complete, the 7-segment LEDs display the current angle for 2s, and 
then switch over to the F0 menu.
You can press the PRG button to exit the auto-tuning state.
12. FB: CTB state display
After you enter the FB menu, the 7-segment LEDs display the input/output state of the 
CTB. The following table describes the meaning of each segment of the LEDs.
Table 4-1 Input/Output state of the CTB
LED 
No.
Segment 
Mark
Meaning of 
Segment
Meaning of ON Diagram
1
A Light curtain 1 Light curtain 1 input active

A
B
C
DP
D
E
F
G

B Light curtain 2 Light curtain 2 input active
C Door open limit 1 Door open limit 1 input active
D Door open limit 2 Door open limit 2 input active
E Door close limit 1 Door close limit 1 input active
F Door close limit 2 Door close limit 2 input active
G Full-load Full-load input active
DP Overload Overload input active
2 A Light-load Light-load signal active
3
A Door open 1 Door open 1 relay output
B Door close 1 Door close 1 relay output
C
Forced door 
close 1
Forced door close 1 relay 
output
D Door open 2 Door open 2 relay output
E Door close 2 Door close 2 relay output
F
Forced door 
close 2
Forced door close 2 relay 
output
G Up arrival gong Up arrival gong relay output
DP
Down arrival 
gong
Down arrival gong relay 
output
13. FC: elevator direction change (same as the function of F2-10)
 ־ 0: Running direction and position pulse direction unchanged
 ־ 1: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction reversed
 ־ 2: Running direction unchanged, position pulse direction reversed
 ־ 3: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction unchanged





Use of the NICE3000
new
                                                                                      NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 70 -
4.2 Use of the LED Operation Panel
The LED operation panel is connected to the RJ45 interface of the controller by using an 
8-core at cable. You can modify the parameters, monitor the working status  and start or 
stop the  controller by  operating the  operation panel. The  following gure shows the LED 
operation panel.
Figure 4-3 Diagram of the LED operation panel

MF.K
RUN
STOP
RES
QUICK
PRG ENTER
RUN
LOCAL/REMOT FED/REV TUNE/TC
RPM
%
A VHz
Data display
Programming 
key
Function 
indicator
RUN key
Fault hiding key
Stop/Reset key
Shift key
Increment 
key
Decrement 
key
Confirm key
Unit indicator
Menu key

4.2.1 Description of Indicators
 
■
RUN
ON indicates that the controller is in the running state, and OFF indicates that the controller 
is in the stop state.
 
■
LOCAL/REMOT
Reserved.
 
■
FWD/REV
ON indicates up direction of the elevator, and OFF indicates down direction of the elevator.
 
■
TUNE/TC
ON indicates the auto-tuning state.
 
■
Unit Indicators
 means that the indicator is ON, and   means that the indicator is OFF.

Hz A V
RPM
%

Hz: unit of frequency

Hz A V
RPM
%

A: unit of current





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                      Use of the NICE3000
new

- 71 -

Hz A V
RPM
%

V: unit of voltage

Hz A V
RPM
%

RPM: unit of rotational speed

Hz A V
RPM
%

%: percentage
4.2.2 Description of Keys on the Operation Panel
Table 4-2 Description of keys on the operation panel
Key Name Function

PRG

Programming Enter or exit Level-I menu.

ENTER

Conrm
Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and conrm the 
parameter setting.
Increment Increase data or function code.
Decrement Decrease data or function code.
Shift
Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or 
running state, and select the digit to be modied when 
modifying parameters.

RUN

Run Start the controller in the operation panel control mode.

STOP
RES

Stop/Reset
Stop the controller when it is in the running state and 
perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state.

MF.K

Fault hiding
Press this key to display or hide the fault information in 
the fault state, which facilitates parameter viewing.

QUICK

Quick Enter or exit Level-I quick menu.
4.2.3 Operation Procedure
The LED operation panel adopts three-level menu.
The three-level menu consists of function code group (Level I), function code (Level II), and 
function code setting value (level III), as shown in the following gure.





Use of the NICE3000
new
                                                                                      NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 72 -
Figure 4-4 Operation procedure on the operation panel

F0
F0.06
50.00
(Select the function 
code group)
(Select the 
function code)
(Set the value of 
the function code)
Level-I menu
Level-II menu
Level-III menu
PRG
PRG
Not to save 
the setting
ENTER
To save 
the setting
ENTER
0.000
ENTER
Status parameter
PRG
F0.07
ENTER
PRG
Next function 
code
(default display)
 
If there is a blinking digit, press     
/    /     to modify the digit.

You can return to Level II menu from Level III menu by pressing 

PRG

 or 

ENTER

. The 
difference between the two is as follows:
 
•
After you press 

ENTER

, the system saves the parameter setting first, and then goes 
back to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code.
 
•
After you press 

PRG

, the system does not save the parameter setting, but directly 
returns to Level II menu and remains at the current function code.
The following gure shows the shift between the three levels of menus.
Figure 4-5 Shift between the three levels of menus

 
 
 
 
 
 
FD
 
…FX-00
 
PRG
ENTER
FE
FP
F0
F1
F2
F3
FE-00
FE-56
FP-02
F0-07
F1-25
F2-18
F3-21
FP-00
F0-00
F1-00
F2-00
F3-00
FD-00
FD-26

In Level III menu, if the parameter has no blinking digit, it means that the parameter cannot 
be modied. This may be because: 
 
•
Such a parameter is only readable, such as actually detected parameters and running 
record parameters.
 
•
Such a parameter cannot be modied in the running state and can only be changed at 
stop. 





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                      Use of the NICE3000
new

- 73 -
4.2.4 Viewing Status Parameters
In the stop or running state, the operation panel can display multiple status parameters. 
Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the equivalent binary bits converted 
from the values of FA-01 and FA-02.
In the stop state, a total of 12 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing 
. You can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-02 (each of the binary bits 
converted from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter).
Figure 4-6 Shift between parameters displayed in the stop state

 
 
 
 
B
u
s
 
v
o
l
t
a
g
e
I
n
p
u
t
 
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
 
l
o
w
 
b
i
t
s
 
I
n
p
u
t
 
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
 
h
i
g
h
 
b
i
t
s
O
u
t
p
u
t
 
f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
 
f
l
o
o
r
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
 
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
C
a
r
 
l
o
a
d
S
l
o
w
-
d
o
w
n
 
d
i
s
t
a
n
c
e
 
a
t
 
r
a
t
e
d
 
s
p
e
e
d
C
T
B
 
o
u
t
p
u
t
 
s
t
a
t
u
s
S
y
s
t
e
m
 
s
t
a
t
u
s
R
a
t
e
d
 
s
p
e
e
d
C
T
B
 
i
n
p
u
t
 
s
t
a
t
u
s
Shift between parameters 
displayed in the stop state

In the running state, a total of 16 parameters can be displayed circularly by pressing 
. You can select the parameters to be displayed by setting FA-01 (each of the binary bits 
converted from the value of FA-02 indicates a parameter).
Figure 4-7 Shift between parameters displayed in the running state

 
 
 
 
R
a
t
e
d
 
s
p
e
e
d
B
u
s
 
v
o
l
t
a
g
e
O
u
t
p
u
t
 
v
o
l
t
a
g
e
O
u
t
p
u
t
 
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
O
u
t
p
u
t
 
f
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y
I
n
p
u
t
 
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
 
l
o
w
 
b
i
t
s
 
I
n
p
u
t
 
t
e
r
m
i
n
a
l
 
h
i
g
h
 
b
i
t
s
O
u
t
p
u
t
 
f
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
 
p
o
s
i
t
i
o
n
C
a
r
 
l
o
a
d
R
u
n
n
i
n
g
 
s
p
e
e
d
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
 
f
l
o
o
r
Shift between parameters 
displayed in the running state
C
T
B
 
i
n
p
u
t
 
s
t
a
t
u
s
P
r
e
-
t
o
r
q
u
e
 
c
u
r
r
e
n
t
S
y
s
t
e
m
 
s
t
a
t
u
s
C
T
B
 
o
u
t
p
u
t
 
s
t
a
t
u
s

For details, see the description of corresponding parameters in Chapter 7.
4.3 Use of the LCD Operator
The LCD operator is a commissioning tool specially designed for the NICE3000
new
, and is 
connected to the RJ45 interface of the NICE3000
new
 by using an 8-core at cable. The LCD 
operator provides functions such as parameter modication, parameter copy, curve display, 
port monitoring, error help, and call display, which facilitates monitoring on all system states. 
It is portal and can display various information, making commissioning of the elevator more 
convenient.
The following gure shows the appearance of the LCD operator.





Use of the NICE3000
new
                                                                                      NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 74 -
Figure 4-8 Appearance of the LCD operator

Knob/Confirm 
key
Left key
Run key
Programming 
key
Display
Right key
Stop key

4.3.1 Keys on the LCD operator
Key Name Function
Left
Press this key to implement the function displayed on the lower 
left corner of the display. 
Right
Press this key to implement the function displayed on the lower 
right corner of the display.
Knob/Conrm 
It has both the knob function and conrm key function. You can 
rotate the knob to increase or decrease the function code or 
data, and press the conrm key to execute the operation or move 
the cursor.
Run
Press this key to start the controller in operation panel control 
mode.
Stop
In operation panel control mode, press this key to stop the 
running in the running state and reset the fault in the fault state.

PRG

Programming  Press this key to return to the upper level menu.
4.3.2 Description of the Display
The following figure shows the structure of the display on the LCD operator (with the 
monitoring interface as an example).
Figure 4-9 Structure of the display

1 Set speed:
0.534
m/s
3 Bus voltage:
220.3
V
2 Rated speed:
1.600
m/s
Menu
Normal
01
Function indication 
bar, indicating the
function of the key
Main display area, 
indicating the 
required information
Status bar, 
indicatinging the real-
time elevator status
Err31





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                      Use of the NICE3000
new

- 75 -
The display of the LCD operator is divided into the following three areas:
 
•
Status bar
It displays the current state information of the elevator, such as running mode, elevator 
state, current oor, and fault information at stop.
 
•
Main display area
It displays the values that can be viewed or modied for different functions. It is the main 
operation interface.
 
•
Operation indication bar
It indicates the functions of the left key and the right key. In the preceding gure, if you 
press the right key, the operation panel switches to the menu interface.
4.3.3 Brief Description of the Interfaces
 
•
Startup interface
This interface displays when the LCD operator is powered on. After staying on this 
interface for a few seconds, the LCD operator switches to the next interface if the 
verication is correct. If the verication is incorrect, a prompt is displayed. All keys are 
invalid on this interface.
Figure 4-10 Startup interface

Elevator control expert
Step with the world
MDKE3-MNK

The monitoring interface automatically appears after the startup interface. The 
monitoring interface displays the values of the monitoring parameters. A maximum of 32 
parameters can be monitored totally, set in FA-01 and FA-02. You can rotate the knob to 
view these parameter values circularly.
Figure 4-11 Monitoring interface

1 Set speed:
0.534
m/s
3 Bus voltage:
220.3
V
2 Rated speed:
1.600
m/s
Menu
Normal
01
Err31

 
•
Main operation interface
The main operation interface includes seven icons. You can select each icon by rotating 
the knob and press the Conrm key to enter the corresponding interface.





Use of the NICE3000
new
                                                                                      NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 76 -
Figure 4-12 Main operation interface

Select
Normal
01
Back
Parameters
Copy
Port
Curve view Call
Err help
?

 ־ Parameters
You can view or modify all function codes of the controller. A three-level menu is 
supported, and you can read and modify the function code value in Level III menu.
 ־ Copy
You can copy parameters of the controller to the LCD operator and download 
parameters to the controller. The LCD operator can store three groups of elevator 
parameters.
 ־ Port
On this interface, you can view the status of all input and output terminals of the 
controller.
 ־ Curve view
You can view the curve of specied controller parameters (such as torque current and 
feedback frequency) changed with the time.
 ־ Call
You can use this function to simulate the car call and hall call signals of all oors.
 ־ Err help
You can view the causes and solutions corresponding to the error code on this interface.
 ־ Operation panel setting
On this interface, you can set the parameters of the LCD operator, including the 
password, time, date, and language. The setting is irrelative to the controller.





5
System Commissioning 
and Application Example 





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 78 -
Chapter 5 System Commissioning and Application Example
5.1 System Commissioning

CAUTION

 
•
Ensure that there is no person in the shaft or car before performing commissioning on the 
elevator.
 
•
Ensure that the peripheral circuit and mechanical installation are ready before performing 
commissioning.
The following gure shows the commissioning procedure of the system.
Figure 5-1 Commissioning procedure of the system

End
Perform trial 
inspection 
running
Perform shaft 
auto-tuning
Perform load cell 
auto-tuning
Commission the 
door machine
Perform trial 
normal-speed 
running
Check the 
leveling 
accuracy
Perform riding 
comfort 
commissioning
Perform function 
commissioning
Start
Check the 
peripheral circuit
Check the 
encoder
Set related 
parameters of the 
elevator
Perform motor 
auto-tuning

5.1.1 Check Before Commissioning
The elevator needs to be commissioned after being installed; the correct commissioning 
guarantees safe and normal running of the elevator. Before performing electric 
commissioning, check whether the electrical part and mechanical part are ready for 
commissioning to ensure safety. 
At least two persons need to be onsite during commissioning so that the power supply can 
be cut off immediately when an abnormality occurs.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 79 -
1. Check the eld mechanical and electric wiring.
Before power-on, check the peripheral wiring to ensure component and personal safety.
The items to be checked include:
1)  Whether the component models are matched
2)  Whether the safety circuit is conducted and reliable
3)  Whether the door lock circuit is conducted and reliable
4)  Whether the shaft is unobstructed, and the car has no passenger and meets the 
conditions for safe running
5)  Whether the cabinet and traction motor are well grounded
6)  Whether the peripheral circuit is correctly wired according to the drawings of the vendor
7)  Whether all switches act reliably
8)  Whether there is short-circuit to ground by checking the inter-phase resistance of the 
main circuit
9)  Whether the elevator is set to the inspection state
10)  Whether the mechanical installation is complete (otherwise, it will result in equipment 
damage and personal injury)
2. Check the encoder.
The pulse signal from the encoder is critical to accurate control of the system. Before 
commissioning, check the following items carefully:
1)  The encoder is installed reliably with correct wiring. For details on the encoder wiring, 
see section 3.7.
2)  The signal cable and strong-current circuit of the encoder are laid in different ducts to 
prevent interference.
3)  The encoder cable is preferably directly connected to the control cabinet. If the cable 
is not long enough and an extension cable is required, the extension cable must be 
a shielding cable and preferably welded to the original encoder cable by using the 
soldering iron.
4)  The shielding cable of the encoder cable is grounded on the end connected to the 
controller (only one end is grounded to prevent interference). 
3. Check the power supply before power-on.
1)  The inter-phase voltage of the user power supply is within (380 V ± 15%), and the 
unbalance degree does not exceed 3%.
2)  The power input voltage between terminals 24V and COM on the MCB is within (24 
VDC ± 15%).
3)  The total lead-in wire gauge and total switch capacity meet the requirements.





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 80 -

Note

If the input voltage exceeds the allowable value, serious damage will be caused. Distinguish the 
negative and positive of the DC power supply. Do not run the system when there is input power 
phase loss.
4. Check the grounding.
1)  Check that the resistance between the following points and the ground is close to 
innity.
 ־ R, S, T and PE
 ־ U, V, W and PE
 ־ 24V and PE on the MCB
 ־ Motor U, V, W and PE 
 ־ Encoder 15V, A, B, PGM and PE
 ־ +, – bus terminals and PE
 ־ Safety circuit, door lock circuit, and inspection circuit terminals and PE
2)  Check the grounding terminals of all elevator electrical components and the power 
supply of the control cabinet
5.1.2 Setting and Auto-tuning of Motor Parameters
The NICE3000
new
 supports two major control modes, sensorless ux vector control (SFVC) 
and closed-loop vector control (CLVC). SFVC is applicable to inspection speed running for 
commissioning and fault judgment running during maintenance of the asynchronous motor. 
CLVC is applicable to normal elevator running. In CLVC mode, good driving performance 
and running efciency can be achieved in the prerequisite of correct motor parameters.
 
■
Motor Parameters to Be Set
The motor parameters that need to be set are listed in the following table.
Table 5-1 Motor parameters to be set
Function Code Parameter Name Description
F1-25 Motor type
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
F1-00 Encoder type
0: SIN/COS encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: ABZ incremental encoder
F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 81 -
Function Code Parameter Name Description
F1-01 to F1-05
Rated motor power
Rated motor voltage
Rated motor current
Rated motor frequency
Rated motor rotational speed
These parameters are model dependent, 
and you need to manually input them 
according to the nameplate.
F0-00 Control mode
0: Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
F0-01 Command source selection
0: Operation panel control
1: Distance control
F8-01 Pre-torque selection
0: Pre-torque invalid
1: Load cell pre-torque compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque compensation
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning
 
■
Precautions for Motor Auto-tuning
Follow the following precautions:
 
•
Ensure that all wiring and installation meet the safety specications.
 
•
Ensure that the motor wiring is correct (UVW cables of the motor respectively connected 
to UVW cables of the controller) for with-load auto-tuning. If the motor wiring is incorrect, 
the motor may jitter or fail to run after the brake is released; in this case, you need to 
replace any two of the motor UVW cables.
 
•
Reset the current fault and then start auto-tuning, because the system cannot enter the 
auto-tuning state ("TUNE" is not displayed) when there is a fault.
 
•
Perform motor auto-tuning again if the phase sequence or encoder of the synchronous 
motor is changed.
 
•
For the synchronous motor, perform three or more times of auto-tuning, compare the 
obtained values of F1-06 (Encoder initial angle). The value deviation of F1-06 shall be 
within ±5°, which indicates that the auto-tuning is successful.
 
•
After the auto-tuning is completed, perform trial inspection running. Check whether the 
current is normal, whether the actual running direction is the same as the set direction. 
If the running direction is different from the set direction, change the value of F2-10.
 
•
With-load auto-tuning is dangerous (inspection-speed running of many control cabinets 
is emergency electric running and the shaft safety circuit is shorted). Ensure that there 
is no person in the shaft in this auto-tuning mode.
The following gure shows the motor auto-tuning process.





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 82 -
Figure 5-2 Motor auto-tuning process

Set F1-25 correctly based on 
the actually used motor type
Set encoder parameters F1-00 
and F1-12 and motor parameters 
F1-01 to F1-05 correctly 
Set F0-01 to 0 
(Operation panel 
control)
For with-load auto-tuning, 
set F1-11 to 1. After the 
operation panel displays 
"TUNE", press the RUN 
key. Static motor auto-
tuning starts. 
(Asynchronous 
motor)
With-load 
auto-tuning
F1-25 = 1 
(Synchronous motor)
With-load auto-tuning
F0-01 = 1
F1-11 = 1
F0-01 = 0
F1-11 = 2
For no-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 
to 2. The operation panel displays 
"TUNE". Release the brake 
manually and press the RUN key. 
Motor auto-tuning starts. 
After motor parameters F1-
14 to F1-18 are obtained, 
restore F0-01 to 1 
(Distance control). Motor 
auto-tuning is completed.
Check the initial angle and wiring mode 
of the encoder (F1-06 and F1-08) after 
motor auto-tuning. Perform motor auto-
tuning multiple times and ensure that 
the difference between values of F1-06 
is within 5° and values of F1-08 are the 
same.
After motor parameter values 
(F1-06 to F1-08, F1-14, F1-19 
to F1-20)) and current loop 
parameters are obtained, 
restore F0-01 to 1 (Distance 
control). Motor auto-tuning is 
completed.
No-load auto-tuning
No-load auto-
tuning
For with-load auto-tuning, set F1-11 to 
1. After the operation panel displays 
"TUNE", press the UP/DOWN button 
for inspection to start auto-tuning. The 
motor starts to run.

 
More descriptions of motor auto-tuning are as follows:
a.  When the NICE3000
new
 drives the synchronous motor, an encoder is required to provide 
feedback signals. You must set the encoder parameters correctly before performing 
motor auto-tuning.
b.  During synchronous motor auto-tuning, the motor needs to rotate. The best auto-tuning 
mode is no-load auto-tuning; if this mode is impossible, then try with-load auto-tuning.
c.  For synchronous motor, with-load auto-tuning learns stator resistance, shaft-D and 
shaft-Q inductance, current loop (including zero servo) PI parameters, and encoder 
initial angle; no-load auto-tuning additionally learns the encoder wiring mode.
d.  For the asynchronous motor, static auto-tuning learns stator resistance, rotor 
resistance, and leakage inductance, and automatically calculates the mutual inductance 
and motor magnetizing current. Complete auto-tuning learns the mutual inductance, 
motor magnetizing current, and current loop parameters are learned.
 
■
Output State of RUN and Brake Contactors
For the sake of safety in different control modes, the system handles the output commands 
to the RUN contactor or brake contactor differently. In some situations, it is necessary to 
release the RUN contactor or the brake contactor manually
The following table lists the output state of the running and brake contactors.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 83 -
Table 5-2 Output state of the running and brake contactors
             Control mode
Output State
No-load Auto-
tuning 
(F1-11 = 2)
With-load Auto-tuning 
(F1-11 = 1)
Operation 
Panel 
Control
(F0-01 = 0)
Distance 
Control 
(F0-01 = 1)
Synchronous 
motor
Asynchronous 
Motor
RUN contactor Output Output Output Not output Output
Brake contactor Not output Output Not output Not output Output 
5.1.3 Trial Running at Normal Speed
After ensuring that running at inspection speed is normal, perform shaft auto-tuning, and 
then you can perform trial running at normal speed (the elevator satises the safety running 
requirements).
To perform shaft auto-tuning, the following conditions must be satised:
1.  The signals of the encoder and leveling sensors (NC, NO) are correct and the slow-
down switches are installed properly and act correctly.
2.  When the elevator is at the bottom oor, the down slow-down 1 switch acts.
3.  The elevator is in the inspection state. The control mode is distance control and CLVC 
(F0-00 = 1, F0-01 = 1).
4.  The top oor number (F6-00) and bottom oor number (F6-01) are set correctly.
5.  The system is not in the fault alarm state. If there is a fault at the moment, press 

STOP
RES

 
to reset the fault.
Then set F1-11 to 3 on the operation panel or set F7 to 1 on the keypad of the MCB, and 
start shaft auto-tuning.

Note

For shaft auto-tuning when there are only two oors, the elevator needs to run to below the bottom 
leveling position, that is, the leveling sensor is disconnected from the leveling plate. There is no 
such requirement when there are multiple oors.
5.1.4 Door Machine Commissioning
Correlation of the door machine controller and the elevator controller is that the CTB outputs 
door open/close command and the door machine controller feeds back the door open/close 
limit signal.
After commissioning and installation of the door machine are complete, check whether the 
wiring is correct and whether the door open/close limit signals are consistent with the default 
setting. To perform the door machine commissioning, do as follows: 
1.  In the terminal control mode of the door machine controller, manually short the door 
open relay output terminal BM/B1 and the door close relay output terminal BM/B2 on 
the CTB, and observe whether the door machine can open and close correspondingly. 





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 84 -
If the door machine cannot act properly, check whether BM/B1 and BM/B2 are 
wrongly connected to the input terminals of the door machine controller and whether 
commissioning of the door machine controller is complete.
2.  After ensuring that control of door open/close is normal, check whether the door open/
close signal feedback from the door machine is normal.
a. Check the NO/NC states of the door input signals by observing the input indicators on 
the CTB, as listed in the following table.
Table 5-3 NO/NC state of the door input signals
Door 
State
Signal Input Point
NO Input Signal NC Input Signal
Indicator State
F5-25 
Setting
Indicator State
F5-25 
Setting
Door open 
limit
X3 (door open limit 1)
When the signal 
is active, the 
corresponding 
input indicator 
is ON.
Bit2 = 1 When the 
signal is 
active, the 
corresponding 
input indicator 
is OFF.
Bit2 = 0
X4 (door open limit 2) Bit4 = 1 Bit4 = 0
Door 
close limit
X5 (door close limit 1) Bit3 = 1 Bit3 = 0
X6 (door close limit 2) Bit5 = 1 Bit5 = 0
For details on the setting of F5-25, see the description of F5-25 in Chapter 7.
b. Check whether the door open/close limit signal received by the system is correct.
As shown in the following figure which is part of display of parameter F5-35 on the 
operation panel, segments E and C of the upmost right 7-segment LED are the 
monitoring points of door open limit and door close limit.
 ־ Segment C ON, segment E OFF: The system receives the door open limit signal and 
the door is in the open state.
 ־ Segment E ON, segment C OFF: The system receives the door close limit signal and 
the door is in the close state.
The two segments should be OFF in the door open/close process.
Control the door to the open or close state manually and view the value of F5-35. If the 
following screen is displayed, it indicates that the door machine controller feeds back 
the correct door open and close signals.
Figure 5-3 Door open and close limit monitoring signals

12345
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
Door 1 open limit
Door 1 close limit





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 85 -
5.1.5 Riding Comfort
The riding comfort is an important factor of the elevator's overall performance. Improper 
installation of mechanical parts and improper parameter settings will cause bad comfort. 
Enhancing the riding comfort mainly involves adjustment of the controller output and the 
elevator's mechanical construction.
 
■
Controller Output
The parameters that may inuence the riding comfort are described in this part.
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
F1-09
Current lter time 
(synchronous motor)
0.00–40.00 0.00
It can reduce the lower-
frequency vertical jitter during 
running.
F1-18 Magnetizing current 0.01–300.00 0.00 A
Increasing the value can 
improve the loading capacity of 
the asynchronous motor.
F2-00
Speed loop proportional 
gain KP1
0–100 40
F2-00 and F2-01 are the PI 
regulation parameters when 
the running frequency is 
lower than F2-02 (Switchover 
frequency 1). F2-03 and 
F2-04 are the PI regulation 
parameters when the running 
frequency is higher than F2-
02 (Switchover frequency 2). 
The regulation parameters 
between F2-02 and F2-04 are 
the weighted average value 
of F2-00 & F2-01 and F2-03 & 
F2-04.
F2-01
Speed loop integral 
time TI1
0.01–10.00s 0.60s
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz
F2-03
Speed loop proportional 
gain KP2
0–100 35
F2-04
Speed loop integral 
time TI2
0.01–10.00s 0.80s
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz
For a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time. 
Be aware that a fast system response causes system oscillation.
The recommended regulating method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot satisfy the requirements, make slight regulation. Increase the 
proportional gain rst to the largest value under which the system does not oscillate. Then 
decrease the integral time to ensure fast responsiveness and small overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are set to 0, 
only F2-03 and F2-04 are valid.
Function 
Code
Parameter Name
Setting 
Range
Default Description
F2-06 Current loop proportional gain 10–500 60
F2-06 and F2-07 are the 
current loop adjustment 
parameters in the vector 
control algorithm.
F2-07 Current loop integral gain 10–500 30





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 86 -
The optimum values of these two parameters are obtained during motor auto-tuning, and 
you need not modify them. Appropriate setting of the parameters can restrain jitter during 
running and have obvious effect on the riding comfort.
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Description
F2-18
Startup acceleration 
time
 0.000–1.500s 0.000s
It can reduce the terrace 
feeling at startup caused by the 
breakout friction of the guide 
rail.
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 m/s 0.000 m/s
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500s 0.000s
F3-18
Zero-speed control 
time at startup
0.000–1.000s 0.200s
It species the zero speed 
holding time before brake 
output.
F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000s 0.200s
It species the time required 
from when the system outputs 
the open signal to when the 
brake is completely released.
F3-20
Zero-speed control 
time at end
0.200–1.500s 0.200s
It species the zero speed 
holding time after the brake is 
applied.
F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000s 0.600s
It species the time from when 
the system outputs the brake 
applying signal to when the 
brake is completely applied.
Figure 5-4 Running time sequence

V (speed)
t (time)
F3-18
F3-19
F8-11
F3-20
RUN contactor
Brake contactor
Shorting door lock 
circuit contactor
Shorting motor
 stator contactor
Internal
 running status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback
Shorting door lock circuit 
contactor feedback
Shorting motor stator 
contactor feedback
F2-17





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 87 -
The release time of the brakes varies according to the types and the response time of the 
brakes is greatly influenced by the ambient temperature. A high brake coil temperature 
slows the brake responsiveness. Thus, when the riding comfort at startup or stop cannot 
be improved by adjusting zero servo or load cell compensation parameters, appropriately 
increase the values of F3-19 and F3-20 to check whether the brake release time inuences 
the riding comfort.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks
F8-01
Pre-torque 
selection
0: Pre-torque invalid
1: Load cell pre-torque 
compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque 
compensation
0
Set this parameter 
based on actual 
requirement.
F2-11
Zero servo current 
coefcient
0.20%–50.0% 15.0%
These are zero-
servo regulating 
parameters when 
F8-01 is set to 
2 (Automatic 
pre-torque 
compensation).
F2-12
Zero servo speed 
loop KP
0.00–2.00 0.50
F2-13
Zero servo speed 
loop KI
0.00–2.00 0.60
When F8-01 is set to 2 (Automatic pre-torque compensation), the system automatically 
adjusts the compensated torque at startup.
a.  Gradually increase F2-11 (Zero servo current coefficient) until that the rollback is 
cancelled at brake release and the motor does not vibrate.
b.  Increase the value of F2-11 (Zero servo current coefcient) if the motor jitters when F2-
13 (Zero servo speed loop TI) is less than 1.00.
c.  Motor vibration and acoustic noise indicate excessive value of F2-12 (Zero servo speed 
loop KP). Use the default value of F2-12.
d.  If the motor noise is large at no-load-cell startup, decrease the values of the zero servo 
current loop parameters (F2-14 and F2-15).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0%–100.0% 50.0%
These are pre-torque 
regulating parameters.
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60
When F8-01 is set to 1 (Load cell pre-torque compensation), the system with a load cell pre-
outputs the torque matched the load to ensure the riding comfort of the elevator. 
 
•
Motor driving state: full-load up, no-load down
 
•
Motor braking state: full-load down, no-load up
"Pre-torque offset" is actually the elevator balance coefcient, namely, the percentage of the 
car load to the rated load when the car and counterweight are balanced. 
"Drive gain" or "Brake gain" scales the  elevator’s present pre-torque coefcient when  the 
motor runs at the drive or brake side. If the gain set is higher, then the calculated value of 





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 88 -
startup pro-torque  compensation is  higher. The controller  identies the  braking or  driving 
state according to the load cell signal and automatically calculates the required torque 
compensation value.
When an analog device is used to measure the load, these parameters are used to adjust 
the elevator startup. The method of adjusting the startup is as follows:
 
•
In the driving state, increasing the value of F8-03 could reduce the rollback during the 
elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
 
•
In the braking state, increasing the value of F8-04 could reduce the jerk in command 
direction during the elevator startup, but a very high value could cause car lurch at start.
 
■
Mechanical Construction
The mechanical construction affecting the riding comfort involves installation of the guide 
rail, guide shoe, steel rope, and brake, balance of the car, and the resonance caused by the 
car, guild rail and motor. For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the 
gearbox may arouse bad riding comfort.
1.  Installation of the guide rail mainly involves the verticality and surface atness of the 
guide rail, smoothness of the guide rail connection and parallelism between two guide 
rails (including guide rails on the counterweight side).
2.  Tightness of the guide shoes (including the one on the counterweight side) also 
inuences the riding comfort. The guide shoes must not be too loose or tight.
3.  The drive from the motor to the car totally depends on the steel rope. Large exibility of 
the steel rope with irregular resistance during the car running may cause curly oscillation 
of the car. In addition, unbalanced stress of multiple steel ropes may cause the car to 
jitter during running.
4.  The riding  comfort during  running may  be inuenced  if the  brake arm  is installed too 
tightly or released incompletely.
5.  If the car weight is unbalanced, it will cause uneven stress of the guide shoes that 
connect the car and the guide rail. As a result, the guide shoes will rub with the guide 
rail during running, affecting the riding comfort.
6.  For asynchronous motor, abrasion or improper installation of the gearbox may also 
affect the riding comfort.
7.  Resonance is an inherent character of a physical system, related to the material 
and quality of system components. If you are sure that the oscillation is caused by 
resonance, reduce the resonance by increasing or decreasing the car weight or 
counterweight and adding resonance absorbers at connections of the components (for 
example, place rubber blanket under the motor).
5.1.6 Password Setting
The NICE3000
new
 provides the parameter password protection function. Here gives an 
example of changing the password into 12345 (  indicates the blinking digit), as shown in 
the following gure.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 89 -
Figure 5-5 Example of changing the password

F00.000
Status parameter
PRG
(default display)
FP
PRG
FP-00
00000
PRG
PRG
ENTER
To save the 
setting
ENTER
ENTER
PRG
FP-01
12345
If there is a blinking digit, press     
/    /     to modify the digit.

 
•
After you set the user password (set FP-00 to a non-zero value), the system requires 
user password authentication (the system displays "------") when you press PRG. In this 
case, you can modify the function code parameters only after entering the password 
correctly.
 
•
For factory parameters (group FF), you also need to enter the factory password.
 
•
Do not try to modify the factory parameters. If these parameters are set improperly, the 
system may be unstable or abnormal.
 
•
In the password protection unlocked state, you can change the password at any time. 
The last input number will be the user password.
 
•
If you want to disable the password protection function, enter the correct password 
and then set FP-00 to 0. If FP-00 is a non-zero value at power-on, the parameters are 
protected by the password.
 
•
Remember the password you set. Otherwise, the system cannot be unlocked.
5.2 System Application
5.2.1 Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure
Passengers may be trapped in the car if power failure suddenly happens during the use of 
the elevator. The emergency evacuation function at power failure is designed to solve the 
problem.
The emergency evacuation function is implemented in the following two modes:
 
•
Uninterrupted power supply (UPS)
 
•
Shorting PMSM stator
The two modes are described in detailed in the following part.
 
■
Emergency Evacuation 220 V UPS
In this scheme, the 220 V UPS provides power supply to the main unit and the drive control 
circuit. The following gure shows the emergency evacuation 220 V UPS circuit.





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 90 -
Figure 5-6 Emergency evacuation 220 V UPS circuit

220 VAC
115 VAC
UPS-220 V
UPC
Safety circuit
21
22
Y6
M6
MCB
61
62
21
22
2
1
3
4
R
N
Transformer
115 VDC
220 VAC
UPS-0 V
(6 A)
(6 A)
A1
A2
65
1413
UPC
NICE3000
new
R
S
T
UPC

Note

The UPS emergency evacuation signal can be output only by Y6.
The following gure shows various contacts of the contactors.
Figure 5-7 Various contacts of the contactors

0 V
Safety contactor
A1 A2
53
54
11
14
Phase sequence relay
Safety circuit
UPC
UPC
71
72
21
22
UPC
X20
24 V
Emergency 
feedback
UPC
2
1
4
3
6
5
13
14
22
21
54
53
61
62 72
71
81
82
110 V

The UPS power is recommended in the following table.
Table 5-4 Recommended UPS power for each power class
UPS Power Controller Power
1 kVA (700–800 W) P ≤ 5.5 kW
2 kVA (1400–1600 W) 5.5 kW < P ≤ 11 kW
3 kVA (2100–2400 W) 15 kW ≤ P ≤ 22 kW





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 91 -
The following table lists the setting of the related parameters.
Table 5-5 Parameter setting under the 220 V UPS scheme
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range
F6-48
Emergency evacuation switching 
speed
0.010–0.630 m/s
F6-49 Evacuation parking oor 0 to F6-01
F8-09
Emergency evacuation operation 
speed at power failure
0.05 m/s
F8-10
Emergency evacuation operation 
mode at power failure
0: Invalid
1: UPS
2: 48 V battery power 
supply
F5-20 (X20) X20 function selection 59 (UPS valid signal)
F5-31 (Y6) Y6 function selection
13 (Emergency evacuation 
automatic switchover)
 
■
Shorting PMSM Stator
Shorting PMSM stator means shorting phases UVW of the PMSM, which produces 
resistance to restrict movement of the elevator car. In field application, an auxiliary NC 
contact is usually added to the NO contact of the output contactor to short PMSM UVW 
phases to achieve the effect. It is feasible in theory but may cause over-current actually. 
Due to the poor quality of the contactor and the wiring of adding the auxiliary contact, the 
residual current of the controller is still high when the outputs UVW are shorted at abnormal 
stop. This results in an over-current fault and may damage the controller or motor. 
Monarch's shorting PMSM stator scheme requires the installation of an independent 
contactor for shorting PMSM stator. The shorting PMSM stator function is implemented via 
the relay NC contact. On the coil circuit of the RUN contactor, an NO contact of the shorting 
PMSM stator contactor is connected in serial, to ensure that output short-circuit does not 
occur when the parameter setting is incorrect.
The following gure shows wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor.





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 92 -
Figure 5-8 Wiring of the independent shorting PMSM stator contactor

Y1
M1
FX: Shorting PMSM stator contactor
NICE3000
new
CN7
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
Y4
M4
Y5
M5
Y6
M6
R
S
T
Three-phase 
AC power 
supply
Safety contactor
Braking resistor
+
– PB
U
V
W
SW: RUN contactor
Safety circuit
5 6
FX
1
2
3
4
5 6
FX
1
2
3
4
M
Encoder
Motor
MCTC-PG
PG card
Y3
M3
110 VAC
FX
SW
X18
CN1
X18
24V
SW
Shielding layer

The parameter setting in such wiring mode is described in the following table.
Table 5-6 Parameter setting under the shorting PMSM stator scheme
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Value Description
F5-18 X18 function selection 30
Allocate X18 with "Input of shorting PMSM 
stator feedback signal".
F5-28 Y3 function selection 12
Allocate Y3 with "Output of shorting PMSM 
stator contactor feedback signal".
FE-33 Bit8 0 Use an NC shorting motor stator contactor.
More details on the emergency evacuation setting are provided in F6-45, as listed in the 
following table.
Table 5-7 Parameter description of F6-45
Bit
Function 
Description
Binary Setting Remarks
Bit0
Direction 
determine 
mode
0
Automatically 
calculating 
the direction
0
Load 
direction 
determining 
(based on 
load cell 
data or half-
load signal)
1
Direction 
of 
nearest 
landing 
oor
If the torque 
direction is 
automatically 
calculated, the no-
load-cell function 
must be enabled, 
that is, F8-01 is set 
to 2.
Bit1 0 1 0





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 93 -
Bit
Function 
Description
Binary Setting Remarks
Bit2 Stop position
1 Stop at the base oor -
0 Stop at nearest landing oor -
Bit3
Door open at 
single leveling 
signal
1 Stop and open door at a single leveling signal -
0 Normal leveling stop -
Bit4
Startup 
compensation
1
Startup torque compensation valid in 
emergency evacuation running
When it is set 
that the torque 
direction is 
automatically 
calculated, 
enable automatic 
startup torque 
compensation.
Bit8
Emergency 
evacuation 
running time 
protection
1
If the elevator does not arrive at the required 
oor after 50s emergency evacuation running 
time, Err31 is reported.
This function 
is invalid when 
the function of 
switching over 
shorting stator 
braking mode to 
controller drive is 
used.
Bit10
Emergency 
buzzer output
1
The buzzer output is active during UPS 
emergency evacuation running.
-
Bit11 Reserved 0 - -
Bit12
Shorting stator 
braking mode 
switched over 
to controller 
drive
1
Enable the function of switching over the 
shorting stator braking mode to controller drive. 
-
Bit13
Mode of 
shorting stator 
braking mode 
switched over 
to controller 
drive
1 Speed setting
If the speed is still 
lower than the 
value set in F6-48 
after the elevator 
is in shorting stator 
braking mode for 
10s, the controller 
starts to drive the 
elevator.
0 Time setting
If the time of the 
shorting stator 
braking mode 
exceeds 50s, the 
controller starts to 
drive the elevator.





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 94 -
Bit
Function 
Description
Binary Setting Remarks
Bit14
Emergency 
evacuation 
exit mode
1 Exit at door close limit -
0 Exit at door open limit -
Bit15
Function 
selection of 
shorting stator 
braking mode
1 Enable this function.
When this function 
is enabled, the 
setting of related 
function codes 
becomes effective.
5.2.2 Parallel Control of Two Elevators
The NICE3000
new
 supports parallel control of two elevators, which is implemented by using 
the CANbus communication port for information exchange and processing between the two 
elevators. The NICE3000
new
 also supports group control of three to eight elevators if a group 
control board is used. This implements coordination between multiple elevators to respond 
to hall calls and improves the elevator use efciency.
The NICE3000
new
 is compatible with the NICE3000 and NICE5000. This section describes 
the use of two elevators in parallel control. For use of multiple elevators in group control, 
refer to the description of the group control board or contact Monarch.
 
■
Communication Ports for Parallel Control
The following table lists the parameter setting of parallel control.
Table 5-8 Parameter setting of parallel control by means of communication ports
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Setting in Parallel Control
F6-07
Number of elevators 
in group mode
1–8 2
F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8
Master elevator: 1
Slave elevator: 2
F6-09
Program control 
selection 2
Bit2: Parallel 
implemented at 
monitoring port
Bit2 = 1 when CN5 of the 
RS232 communication port is 
used for parallel control
Bit3: Parallel 
implemented at 
CAN2
Bit3 = 1 when CN4 of the CAN2 
communication port is used for 
parallel control
Bit4: Parallel control 
in compatibility with 
NICE3000
Bit4 = 1 when the NICE3000 
is involved in parallel/group 
control

Note

By default, the CAN1 communication port is used for parallel control by default. Therefore, you 
need not select the parallel control port. 
When the CAN2 communication port is used for parallel control, you need not set the CTB address 





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 95 -
switch.
 
■
Parallel Control by Using CAN1 (Terminal CN3)
When the CAN1 communication port (CN3 terminal) is used for parallel control, you need to 
set the CTB addresses, according to the following table.
Table 5-9 Address and jumper setting of the CTB for CAN1 is used for parallel control
CTB Jumper Setting Address Setting
CTB of elevator 1#

J2
ON OFF

CTB of master elevator
CTB of elevator 2#

J2
ON
OFF

CTB of slave elevator
Figure 5-9 Wiring when CAN1 is used for parallel control

NICE3000
new
CN3
CN7
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
Y4
M4
Y5
M5
Y6
M6
24V
COM
CAN+
CAN-
MOD+
MOD-
CN2
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
1
2
3
4
Up button indicator
Up button
NICE3000
new
CN3
CN7
Y1
M1
Y2
M2
Y3
M3
Y4
M4
Y5
M5
Y6
M6
24V
COM
CAN+
CAN-
MOD+
MOD-
CN2
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
1
2
3
4
Elevator 
1#
Elevator 
1#
Elevator 
2#
Elevator 
2#
1
2
3
4
Down button indicator
Down button
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
JP3
JP4
JP1
JP2
1
2
3
4
JP3
JP4
1
2
3
4
JP1
JP2
1
2
3
4
CAN1 cables for 
parallel control

 
■
Parallel Control by Using CAN2 (Terminal CN4)
This mode can be implemented by directly connecting the CN4 terminals of two elevators 
and setting related parameters of group F6. You need not set the CTB addresses.





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 96 -
Figure 5-10 Wiring when CAN2 is used for parallel control

NICE3000
new
CN3
CN4
24V
COM
CAN+
CAN-
MOD+
MOD-
CN2
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
1
2
3
4
Up button indicator
Up button
NICE3000
new
CN3
CN4
24V
COM
CAN+
CAN-
MOD+
MOD-
CN2
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
1
2
3
4
Elevator 
1#
Elevator 
1#
Elevator 
2#
Elevator 
2#
1
2
3
4
Down button indicator
Down button
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
JP3
JP4
JP1
JP2
1
2
3
4
JP3
JP4
1
2
3
4
JP1
JP2
1
2
3
4
CAN2+
CAN2-
GND
CAN2+
CAN2-
GND
CAN2 cables for 
parallel control

 
■
Parallel Control by Using RS232 (Terminal CN5)
When CANbus communication is applied for parallel control, if the 24 V power voltages of 
two systems are different or the external interference is severe, the communication effect 
is affected. To achieve better communication effect in parallel mode, we adopt RS485 at 
terminal CN5 of the monitoring port on the MCB for communication of the parallel mode. 
In this case, the RS232 communication signal needs to be converted to RS485 
communication signal. Thus, two optical-isolated RS232/RS485 converters (model: U485A) 
are required. 
The following figure shows the wiring of parallel control implemented at the RS232 
monitoring port.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 97 -
Figure 5-11 Wiring of parallel control implemented at the monitoring port

NICE3000
new
CN3
24V
COM
CAN+
CAN-
MOD+
MOD-
CN2
24V
CAN+
CAN-
COM
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
1
2
3
4
Up button indicator
Up button
NICE3000
new
CN3
24V
COM
CAN+
CAN-
MOD+
MOD-
CN2
24V
CAN+
CAN-
CO
M
CTB
MCTC-CTB
HCB
MCTC-HCB
24V
COM
MOD+
MOD-
1
2
3
4
Elevator 
1#
Elevator 
1#
Elevator 
2#
Elevator 
2#
1
2
3
4
Down button indicator
Down button
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
JP3
JP4
JP1
JP2
1
2
3
4
JP3
JP4
1
2
3
4
JP1
JP2
1
2
3
4
CN5 CN5
B
D+
D-
D+
D-
RS232-RS485 converter
RS232-RS485 converter
RS485 cables for 
parallel control

 
■
Setting of Physical Floors
Physical oors, relative to the NICE control system, are dened by the installation position 
of the leveling plate. The oor (such as the ground oor) at which the lowest leveling plate is 
installed corresponds to physical oor 1. The top physical oor is the accumulative number 
of the leveling plates. In parallel mode, the physical oor numbers of the same oor for two 
elevators are consistent.
If the oor structures of two elevators are different, physical oors should start with the oor 
with the lowest position. The physical oors at the overlapped area of the two elevators are 
the same. Even if one elevator does not stop a oor in the overlapped area, a leveling plate 
should be installed there. You can make the elevator not stop at the oor by setting service 
oors.





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 98 -
When two elevators are in parallel mode, the addresses of the HCBs should be set 
according to physical floors. Parallel running can be implemented only when the HCB 
address set for one elevator is the same as that for the other elevator in terms of the same 
oor.

Note

In parallel mode, the top oor (F6-00) and bottom oor (F6-01) of the elevators should be set 
based on corresponding physical oors.
Assume that there are two elevators in parallel mode. Elevator 1 stops at oor B1, oor 1, 
oor 2, and oor 3, while elevator 2 stops at oor 1, oor 3, and oor 4. Now, you need to 
set related parameters and HCB addresses according to the following table.
Table 5-10 Parameter setting and HCB addresses of two elevators
Elevator 1 Elevator 2
Number of elevators in 
group mode 
2 2
Elevator No. 1 2
Actual oor
Physical 
oor
HCB 
address
HCB display HCB address HCB display
B1 1 1 FE-01 = 1101
1 2 2 FE-02 = 1901 2 FE-02 = 1901
2 3 3 FE-03 = 1902
Non-stop oor 
but leveling 
plate required
FE-03 = 1902
3 4 4 FE-04 = 1903 4 FE-04 = 1903
4 5 5 FE-05 = 1904
Bottom oor
(F6-01)
1 2
Top oor (F6-00) 4 5
Service oor (F6-05) 65535
65531 (not stop at physical oor 
3)





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 99 -
5.2.3 Opposite Door Control
Set related parameters according to the following table.
Table 5-11 Parameter setting for opposite door control
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
F6-40
Program control 
selection 1
Bit2: JP16 input used as back door selection 
(button)
0
Bit3: JP16 input used as the back door open 
signal
0
Bit4: Opening only one door of opposite doors 
under manual control
0
Bit13: Folding command used as disability 
function (= 1) and back door function (= 0)
0
Bit14: Car call command folding 0
Bit15: JP20 used for switchover to back door 0
F8-16
Start address of 
hall call auxiliary 
command
0–40 0
FB-00
Number of door 
machine(s)
1–2 1
FE-33
Elevator function 
selection 2
Bit15: Opposite door independent control 0





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 100 -
Table 5-12 Selection of the opposite door mode
Opposite 
Door Mode
Parameter Setting Function Description Use Method
Old mode (same as the NICE3000)
Mode 1
FE-33 
Bit15 = 1;
Fb-00 = 2
FC-04 = 0 
(Simultaneous 
control)
The front door and back 
door acts simultaneously 
upon arrival for hall calls 
and car calls.
The hall call 
addresses of the 
front door are set 
based on oor (1-
15). The hall call 
addresses of the 
back door are set 
based on oor +16 
(17-31).
Two CCBs are 
connected in serial. 
The car calls of 
the front door are 
controlled by JP1 
to JP15 of CCB1, 
and the car calls of 
the back door are 
controlled by JP1 to 
JP15 of CCB2.
A maximum of 15 
oors are supported.
Mode 2
FC-04 = 1 (Hall call 
independent, car 
call simultaneous)
The corresponding door 
opens upon arrival for hall 
calls from this door. The 
front door and back door 
act simultaneously upon 
arrival for car calls.
Mode 3
FC-04 = 2 (Hall call 
independent, car 
call manual control)
The corresponding door 
opens upon arrival for halls 
call from this door. Upon 
arrival for car calls, the 
door to open is selected 
between the front door and 
back door by using the door 
switchover switch.
Mode 4
FC-04 = 3 (Hall call 
independent, car 
call independent)
The corresponding door 
opens upon arrival for halls 
call and car calls from this 
door.
New mode
Mode 1
Fb-00 = 2
F8-16 = 
N (N > 
current 
top oor
FC-04 = 0 
(Simultaneous 
control)
The front door and back 
door act simultaneously 
upon arrival for hall calls 
and car calls.
The hall call 
addresses of the 
front door are set 
based on oor (1-
N). The hall call 
addresses of the 
back door are set 
based on oor (N+1 
to 40).
The front door CCB 
is connected to CN7 
of the CTB, and the 
back door CCB is 
connected to CN8 of 
the CTB.
A maximum of 20 
oors are supported.
Mode 2
FC-04 = 1 (Hall call 
independent, car 
call simultaneous)
The corresponding door 
opens upon arrival for hall 
calls from this door. The 
front door and back door 
act simultaneously upon 
arrival for car calls.
Mode 3
FC-04 = 2 (Hall call 
independent, car 
call manual control)
The corresponding door 
opens upon arrival for halls 
call from this door. Upon 
arrival for car calls, the 
door to open is selected 
between the front door and 
back door by using the door 
switchover switch.
Mode 4
FC-04 = 3 (Hall call 
independent, car 
call independent)
The corresponding door 
opens upon arrival for halls 
call and car calls from this 
door.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                        System Commissioning and Application Example                                   

- 101 -

Note

In the re emergency, inspection or re-leveling state, the opposite door is under simultaneous 
control rather than independent control.
 
5.2.4 VIP Function Description
The NICE3000
new
 provides the VIP function that the elevator rst directly runs to the VIP 
floor and provides services for special persons. After the system enters the VIP state, 
current car calls and halls are cleared; door open or close needs to be controlled manually; 
the elevator does not respond to hall calls.
Here gives an example to explain how to use the VIP function and set the VIP oor.
Assume that there are oors 1 to 20 for the elevator, and oor 8 is set as the VIP oor.
Table 5-13 Parameter setting of the VIP function
Function 
Code
Parameter 
Name
Setting Range Value Remarks
F6-00
Top oor of 
the elevator
F6-01 to 40 20
They are used to set the top 
oor and bottom oor of the 
elevator, determined by the 
number of actually installed 
leveling plates.
F6-01
Bottom 
oor of the 
elevator
1 to F6-00 1
F6-12 VIP oor 0 to F6-00 8 Set oor 8 as the VIP oor.
FE-32
Elevator 
function 
selection 1
Bit9: VIP function Bit9 = 1 The VIP service is enabled.
Fd-07
HCB:JP1 
input
0: Reserved
NO/NC input: 
1/33: Elevator lock signal 
2/34: Fire emergency signal
3/35: Current oor forbidden
4/36: VIP oor signal
5/37: Security oor signal
6/38: Door close button 
input
4
These parameters are used 
to set the functions of pins 2 
and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the 
HCB. The setting is effective 
to the HCBs for all oors.
Fd-08
HCB:JP2 
input
4
F6-46
VIP function 
selection
Bit0: VIP enabled by hall 
call (at VIP oor)
Bit0 = 1
The VIP function is enabled 
at a hall call.
Bit1: VIP enabled by 
terminal
Bit1 = 1
After the hall call input for 
the VIP function is active, the 
system enters the VIP state.
Bit2 to Bit7: Reserved - -
Bit8: Number of VIP car 
calls limited
Bit8 = 1
If this function is enabled, 
only one car call is supported 
in the VIP state.





System Commissioning and Application Example                                        NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 102 -
When there is a hall call at the VIP oor, the system automatically enters the VIP state. After 
the VIP input terminal is ON, the elevator returns to the VIP oor to provide the VIP service.
The VIP running times is limited by bit8 of F6-46. If bit8 is set to 1, the elevator responds to 
only one car call (the last one); after arriving at the oor required by the car call, the elevator 
automatically exits the VIP state. If bit8 is set to 0, the number of car calls is not limited. 
The elevator automatically exits the VIP state if it does not enter the car call running within 
30s after each time stop or after it executes all car calls. If there is no car call 30s after the 
elevator enters the VIP state, the elevator automatically exits the VIP state.





6
Function Code Table





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 104 -
Chapter 6 Function Code Table
6.1 Function Code Description
1.  There are a total of 18 function code groups, each of which includes several function 
codes. The function codes adopt the three-level menu. The function code group number 
is Level-I menu; the function code number is Level-II menu; the function code setting is 
Level-III menu.
2.  The meaning of each column in the function code table is as follows:
Function Code Indicates the function code number.
Parameter Name
Indicates the parameter name of the function 
code.
Setting Range Indicates the setting range of the parameter.
Default
Indicates the default setting of the parameter at 
factory.
Unit Indicates the measurement unit of the parameter.
Property
Indicates whether the parameter can be modied 
(including the modication conditions) 
The modication property of the parameters includes three types, described as follows:
"
☆
": The parameter can be modied when the controller is in either stop or running state.
"
★
": The parameter cannot be modied when the controller is in the running state.
"
●
": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modied.
The system automatically restricts the modification property of all parameters to prevent 
mal-function.
6.2 Function Code Groups
On the LED operation panel, press 

PRG

 and then   or   , and you can view 
the function code groups. The function code groups are classied as follows: 





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 105 -
F0 Basic parameters F9 Time parameters
F1 Motor parameters FA Keypad setting parameters
F2 Vector control parameters Fb Door function parameters
F3 Running control parameters FC Protection function parameters
F4 Floor parameters Fd Communication parameters
F5 Terminal function parameters FE Elevator function parameters
F6 Basic elevator parameters FF Factory parameters
F7 Test function parameters FP User parameters
F8 Enhanced function parameters Fr Leveling adjustment parameters
6.3 Function Code Table
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Group F0: Basic parameters
F0-00 Control mode
0: Sensorless ux vector 
control (SFVC)
1: Closed-loop vector 
control (CLVC)
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/
F) control
1 -
★
F0-01
Command source 
selection
0: Operation panel 
control
1: Distance control
1 -
★
F0-02
Running speed under 
operation panel control
0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s
☆
F0-03
Maximum running 
speed
0.100 to F0-04 1.600 m/s
★
F0-04 Rated elevator speed 0.250–4.000 1.600 m/s
★
F0-05 Rated elevator load 300–9999 1000 kg
★
F0-06 Maximum frequency 20.00–99.00 50.00 Hz
★
F0-07 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0 kHz
★
Group F1: Motor parameters
F1-00 Encoder type
0: SIN/COS encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: ABZ incremental 
encoder
0 -
★
F1-01 Rated motor power 0.7–75.0
Model 
dependent
kW
★
F1-02 Rated motor voltage 0–600
Model 
dependent
V
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 106 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00
Model 
dependent
A
★
F1-04 Rated motor frequency 0.00–99.00 50.00 Hz
★
F1-05
Rated motor rotational 
speed
0–3000 1460 RPM
★
F1-06
Encoder initial angle 
(synchronous motor)
0.0–359.9 0
Degree 
(°)
★
F1-07
Encoder angle 
at power-off 
(synchronous motor)
0.0–359.9 0
Degree 
(°)
★
F1-08
Synchronous motor 
wiring mode
0–15 0 -
★
F1-09
Current lter time 
(synchronous motor)
0–40 0 -
★
F1-10
Encoder verication 
selection
0–65535 0 -
★
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning
0 -
★
F1-12
Encoder pulses per 
revolution
0–10000 2048 PPR
★
F1-13
Encoder wire-breaking 
detection time
0–10.0 1.0 s
★
F1-14
Stator resistance 
(asynchronous motor)
0.000–30.000
Model 
dependent
Ω
★
F1-15
Rotor resistance 
(asynchronous motor)
0.000–30.000 
Model 
dependent
Ω
★
F1-16
Leakage inductance 
(asynchronous motor)
0.00–300.00
Model 
dependent
mH
★
F1-17
Mutual inductance 
(asynchronous motor)
0.1–3000.0
Model 
dependent
mH
★
F1-18
Magnetizing current 
(asynchronous motor)
0.01–300.00
Model 
dependent
A
★
F1-19
Shaft Q inductance
(torque)
0.00–650.00 3.00 mH
★
F1-20
Shaft D inductance 
(excitation)
0.00–650.00 3.00 mH
★
F1-21 Back EMF 0–65535 0 -
★
F1-25 Motor type
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
1 -
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 107 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Group F2: Vector control parameters
F2-00
Speed loop 
proportional gain KP1
0–100 40 -
★
F2-01
Speed loop integral 
time TI1
0.01–10.00 0.60 s
★
F2-02
Switchover frequency 
1
0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz
★
F2-03
Speed loop 
proportional gain KP2
0–100 35 -
★
F2-04
Speed loop integral 
time TI2
0.01–10.00 0.80 s
★
F2-05
Switchover frequency 
2
F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz
★
F2-06
Current loop KP1 
(torque)
10–500 60 -
★
F2-07
Current loop KI1 
(torque)
10–500 30 -
★
F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 %
★
F2-10
Elevator running 
direction
0: Running direction and 
position pulse direction 
unchanged
1: Running direction 
reversed, position pulse 
direction reversed
2: Running direction 
unchanged, position 
pulse direction reversed
3: Running direction 
reversed, position pulse 
direction unchanged
0 -
★
F2-11
Zero servo current 
coefcient
0.20–50.0 15 -
★
F2-12
Zero servo speed loop 
KP
0.00–2.00 0.5 -
★
F2-13
Zero servo speed loop 
KI
0.00–2.00 0.6 -
★
F2-16
Torque acceleration 
time
1–500 1 ms
★
F2-17
Torque deceleration 
time
1–500 350 ms
★
F2-18
Startup acceleration 
time
0.000–1.500 0.000 s
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 108 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Group F3: Running control parameters
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s
★
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.000 s
★
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s
2
★
F3-03
Acceleration start jerk 
time
0.300–4.000 2.500 s
★
F3-04
Acceleration end jerk 
time
0.300–4.000 2.500 s
★
F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s
2
★
F3-06
Deceleration end jerk 
time
0.300–4.000 2.500 s
★
F3-07
Deceleration start jerk 
time
0.300–4.000 2.500 s
★
F3-08
Special deceleration 
rate
0.500–2.000 0.900 m/s
2
★
F3-09
Pre-deceleration 
distance
0–90.0 0.0 mm
★
F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.000–0.080 0.040 m/s
★
F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.630 0.250 m/s
★
F3-12
Position of up slow-
down 1 
0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-13
Position of down slow-
down 1
0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-14
Position of up slow-
down 2
0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-15
Position of down slow-
down 2
0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-16
Position of up slow-
down 3
0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-17
Position of down slow-
down 3
0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-18
Zero-speed control 
time at startup
0.000–1.000 0.200 s
★
F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s
★
F3-20
Zero-speed control 
time at end
0.200–1.500 0.200 s
★
F3-21
Low-speed re-leveling 
speed
0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s
★
Group F4: Floor parameters
F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 109 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-01 Current oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
F4-02
High byte of current 
oor position
0–65535 1 Pulses
●
F4-03
Low byte of current 
oor position
0–65535 34464 Pulses
●
F4-04
Length 1 of leveling 
plate
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-05
Length 2 of leveling 
plate
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-06
High byte of oor 
height 1
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-07
Low byte of oor height 
1
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-08
High byte of oor 
height 2
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-09
Low byte of oor height 
2
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-10
High byte of oor 
height 3
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-11
Low byte of oor height 
3
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-12
High byte of oor 
height 4
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-13
Low byte of oor height 
4
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-14
High byte of oor 
height 5
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-15
Low byte of oor height 
5
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-16
High byte of oor 
height 6
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-17
Low byte of oor height 
6
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-18
High byte of oor 
height 7
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-19
Low byte of oor height 
7
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-20
High byte of oor 
height 8
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-21
Low byte of oor height 
8
0–65535 0 Pulses
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 110 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-22
High byte of oor 
height 9
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-23
Low byte of oor height 
9
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-24
High byte of oor 
height 10
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-25
Low byte of oor height 
10
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
Floor height 11 to oor height 37
F4-80
High byte of oor 
height 38
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-81
Low byte of oor height 
38
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-82
High byte of oor 
height 39
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-83
Low byte of oor height 
39
0–65535 0 Pulses
★
Group F5: Terminal function parameters
F5-00
Attendant/Automatic 
switchover time
3–200 3 s
★
F5-01 X1 function selection
08/40: Inspection signal
09/41: Inspection up 
signal
10/42: Inspection down 
signal
11/43: Fire emergency 
signal
12/44: Up limit signal
13/45: Down limit signal
14/46: Overload signal
15/47: Full-load signal
16/48: Up slow-down 1 
signal
17/49: Down slow-down 
1 signal
18/50: Up slow-down 2 
signal
(To be continued)
33 -
★
F5-02 X2 function selection 35 -
★
F5-03 X3 function selection 34 -
★
F5-04 X4 function selection 4 -
★
F5-05 X5 function selection 5 -
★
F5-06 X6 function selection 38 -
★
F5-07 X7 function selection 39 -
★
F5-08 X8 function selection 22 -
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 111 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-09 X9 function selection
19/51: Down slow-down 
2 signal
20/52: Up slow-down 3 
signal
21/53: Down slow-down 
3 signal
22/54: Shorting door 
lock circuit contactor 
feedback
23/55: Fireghter switch 
signal
24/56: Door machine 1 
light curtain signal
25/57: Door machine 2 
light curtain signal
26/58: Brake contactor 
feedback 2 signal
27/59: UPS valid signal
28/60: Elevator lock 
signal
29/61: Safety circuit 2 
feedback signal
30/62: Shorting PMSM 
stator feedback signal
31/63: Door lock circuit 2 
feedback signal
32/64: Reserved
65/97: Door machine 1 
safety edge signal
66/98: Door machine 2 
safety edge signal
67/99: Motor overheat 
signal
68/100: Earthquake 
signal
69/101: Back door 
forbidden signal
70/102: Light-load signal
71/103: Half-load signal
72/104: Fire emergency 
oor switchover signal
(End)
40 -
★
F5-10 X10 function selection 09 -
★
F5-11 X11 function selection 10 -
★
F5-12 X12 function selection 44 -
★
F5-13 X13 function selection 45 -
★
F5-14 X14 function selection 48 -
★
F5-15 X15 function selection 49 -
★
F5-16 X16 function selection 50 -
★
F5-17 X17 function selection 51 -
★
F5-18 X18 function selection 00 -
★
F5-19 X19 function selection 00 -
★
F5-20 X20 function selection 00 -
★
F5-21 X21 function selection 00 -
★
F5-22 X22 function selection 00 -
★
F5-23 X23 function selection 00 -
★
F5-24 X24 function selection 00 -
★
F5-25 CTB input type 0–511 320 -
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 112 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-26 Y1 function selection
0: Invalid
1: RUN contactor control
2: Brake contactor 
control
3: Shorting door lock 
circuit contactor control
4: Fire emergency oor 
arrival signal feedback
5: Door machine 1 open
6: Door machine 1 close
7: Door machine 2 open
8: Door machine 2 close
9: Brake and RUN 
contactors healthy
10: Fault state
11: Running monitor
12: Shorting PMSM 
stator contactor
13: Emergency 
evacuation automatic 
switchover
14: System healthy
15: Emergency buzzer 
control
16: High-voltage startup 
of brake
17: Elevator running in 
up direction
18: Lamp/Fan running
19: Medical sterilization
20: Non-door zone stop
21: Electric lock
22: Non-service state
1 -
★
F5-27  Y2 function selection 2 -
★
F5-28 Y3 function selection 3 -
★
F5-29 Y4 function selection 4 -
★
F5-30 Y5 function selection 0 -
★
F5-31  Y6 function selection 0 -
★
F5-32
Communication state 
display
Monitoring of 
CANbus and Modbus 
communication states
- -
●





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 113 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-33
Terminal program 
control
Bit3: Elevator re 
emergency requirement 
for Hong Kong
Bit4: Arrival gong 
disabled at night
Bit6: Door lock 
disconnected at 
inspection switched over 
to normal running
Bit7: Fault code not 
displayed on the keypad
Bit8: Door open 
command cancelled 
immediately at door 
open limit
Bit9: Car stop and zero-
speed torque holding 
at abnormal brake 
feedback
0 -
★
F5-34 Terminal state display
Monitoring of I/O 
terminals on MCB
- -
●
F5-35 Terminal state display
Monitoring of I/O 
terminals on CTB, CCB 
and HOP
- -
●
F5-36
Load cell input 
selection
0: Invalid
1: CTB digital input
2: CTB analog input
3: MCB analog input
1 -
★
F5-37 X25 function selection
0: No function
4: Safety circuit signal
5: Door lock circuit signal
0 -
★
F5-38 X26 function selection 0 -
★
F5-39 X27 function selection 0 -
★
Group F6: Basic elevator parameters
F6-00
Top oor of the 
elevator
F6-01 to 40 9 -
★
F6-01
Bottom oor of the 
elevator
1 to F6-00 1 -
★
F6-02 Parking oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
F6-03 Fire emergency oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
F6-04 Elevator lock oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
F6-05 Service oors 1 0–65535 65535 -
★
F6-06 Service oors 2 0–65535 65535 -
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 114 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-07
Number of elevators in 
group mode
1–8 1 -
★
F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8 1 -
★
F6-09
Elevator program 
control
Bit0: Dispersed waiting
Bit2: Parallel 
implemented at 
monitoring port
Bit3: Parallel 
implemented at CAN2
Bit4: Parallel control 
in compatibility with 
NICE3000
Bit6: Clear oor number 
and display direction in 
advance
Bit8: Single hall call 
button
Bit10: Err30 judgment at 
re-leveling cancellation
Bit14: Time interval 
detection of safety circuit 
2 and door lock circuit 2
0 -
★
F6-10
Leveling sensor lter 
time
10–50 14 ms
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 115 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-11
Elevator function 
selection
Bit1: Disabling returning 
to base oor for 
verication
Bit2: Cancelling auto 
sequential arrange of 
hall call oor addresses 
to be displayed
Bit5: Current detection 
valid at startup for 
synchronous motor
Bit6: Reversing MCB 
lamp output
Bit7: Door open valid 
at non-door zone in the 
inspection state
Bit8: Door open and 
close once after 
inspection turned to 
normal
Bit10: Buzzer not tweet 
upon re-leveling
Bit11: Super short oor 
function
Bit13: Err53 fault auto 
reset
Bit14: Up slow-down not 
reset for super short oor
Bit15: Down slow-down 
not reset for super short 
oor
8448 -
★
F6-12 VIP oor 0 to F6-00 0 -
★
F6-13 VIP oor 0 to F6-00 0 -
★
F6-14
Start time of down 
collective selective 1
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-15
End time of down 
collective selective 1 
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-16
Start time of down 
collective selective 2 
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-17
End time of down 
collective selective 2
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-18
Start time of time-
based oor service 1
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-19
End time of time-based 
oor service 1
00.00–23.59 0 HH.MM
☆





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 116 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-20
Service oor 1 of time-
based oor service 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-21
Service oor 2 of time-
based oor service 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-22
Start time of time-
based oor service 2
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-23
End time of time-based 
oor service 2
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-24
Service oor 1 of time-
based oor service 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-25
Service oor 2 of time-
based oor service 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-26 Peak 1 start time 00.00–23.59 0 HH.MM
☆
F6-27 Peak 1 end time 00.00–23.59  0 HH.MM
☆
F6-28 Peak 1 oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
F6-29 Peak 2 start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-30 Peak 2 end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-31 Peak 2 oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
F6-35 Service oor 3 0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-36
Service oor 3 of time-
based oor service 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-37
Service oor 3 of time-
based oor service 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-38 Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-39 Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59  00.00 HH.MM
☆





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 117 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-40
Program control 
selection 1
Bit0: Disability function
Bit1: Soft limit function
Bit2: JP16 input used as 
back door selection
Bit3: JP16 input used 
as the back door open 
signal
Bit4: Opening only one 
door of opposite doors 
under manual control
Bit5: Timed elevator lock
Bit6: Manual door
Bit7: Elevator lock/Fire 
emergency under hall 
call at any oor
Bit9: Disabling reverse 
oor number clear
Bit10: Displaying next 
arriving oor number
Bit11: Responding to car 
calls rst
Bit12: Car call assisted 
command in single 
door used as disability 
function
Bit13: Folding command 
used as disability 
function and back door 
function
Bit14: Car call command 
folding
Bit15: JP20 used for 
switchover to back door
0 -
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 118 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-41
Program control 
selection 2
Bit2: Inspection to stop 
due to slow-down 1
Bit4: Buzzer tweet during 
door open delay
Bit6: Cancelling door 
open delay
Bit8: Elevator lock at 
door open
Bit9: Display available at 
elevator lock
Bit10: Elevator lock in 
the attendant state
Bit11: Blinking at arrival 
(within the time set in 
F6-47)
Bit12: Door re-open 
during door open delay
Bit13: Door re-open after 
car call of the present 
oor
0 -
★
F6-42
Program control 
selection 3
Bit1: Cancelling door 
open/close command at 
delay after door open/
close limit
Bit2: Not judging door 
lock state at door close 
output
Bit3: Door close 
command output during 
running
0 -
★
F6-43
Attendant function 
selection
bit0: Calls cancelled after 
entering attendant state
bit1: Not responding to 
hall calls
bit2: Attendant/Automatic 
state switchover
bit3: Door close at 
jogging
bit4: Automatic door 
close
bit5: Buzzer tweet at 
intervals in attendant 
state
bit6: Buzzer tweet at 
intervals in attendant 
state
0 -
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 119 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-44
Fire emergency 
function selection
Bit3: Arrival gong output 
in inspection or re 
emergency state
Bit4: Multiple car 
calls registered in re 
emergency state
Bit5: Retentive at power 
failure in re emergency 
state
Bit6: Closing door by 
holding down the door 
close button
Bit7: Door close at low 
speed
Bit8: Door close at car 
call registering
Bit9: Displaying hall calls 
in re emergency state
Bit11: Exiting re 
emergency state for 
reghter
Bit14: Opening door by 
holding down the door 
open button
Bit15: Automatic door 
open in re emergency 
oor
16456 -
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 120 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-45
Emergency evacuation 
function selection
Bit0-Bit1: Direction 
determine mode
(00: Automatically 
calculating direction; 
01: Load direction 
determining; 10: 
Direction of nearest 
landing oor)
Bit2: Stopping at 
evacuation parking oor
Bit3: Door open at single 
leveling signal
Bit4: Compensation at 
startup
Bit8: Emergency running 
time protection
Bit10: Emergency buzzer 
output
Bit12: Shorting stator 
braking mode switched 
over to controller drive
Bit13: Mode of shorting 
stator braking mode 
switched over to 
controller drive
Bit14: Emergency 
evacuation exit mode
Bit15: Function selection 
of shorting stator braking 
mode
0 -
★
F6-46 VIP function selection
Bit0: VIP enabled by hall 
call (at VIP oor)
Bit1: VIP enabled by 
terminal
Bit8: Number of VIP car 
calls limited
0 s
★
F6-47 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 0 s
☆
F6-48
Emergency evacuation 
switching speed
0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s
★
F6-49
Evacuation parking 
oor
0 to F6-01 0 -
★
Group F7: Test function parameters
F7-00 Car call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 -
☆
F7-01 Up call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 -
☆





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 121 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-02
Down call oor 
registered
0 to F6-00 0 -
☆
F7-03 Random running times 0–60000 0 -
☆
F7-04 Hall call enabled
0: Yes
1: No
0 -
☆
F7-05 Door open enabled
0: Yes
1: No
0 -
☆
F7-06 Overload function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 -
☆
F7-07 Limit switch
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0 -
☆
F7-08
Time interval of 
random running
0–1000 0 s
☆
Group F8: Enhanced function parameters
F8-00
Load for load cell auto-
tuning
0–100 0 %
★
F8-01 Pre-torque selection
0: Pre-torque invalid
1: Load cell pre-torque 
compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque 
compensation
0 -
★
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 %
★
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 -
★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 -
★
F8-05 Current car load 0–1023 0 -
●
F8-06 Car no-load load 0–1023 0 -
★
F8-07 Car full-load load 0–1023 100 -
★
F8-08 Anti-nuisance function
0: Anti-nuisance function 
disabled
1: Nuisance judged by 
load cell
2: Nuisance judged by 
light curtain
4: Nuisance judged by 
light-load signal
0 -
☆
F8-09
Emergency evacuation 
operation speed at 
power failure
0.000–0.100 0.050 m/s
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 122 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-10
Emergency evacuation 
operation mode at 
power failure
0: Motor not running
1: UPS
2: 48 V battery power 
supply
0 -
★
F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s
☆
F8-12 Fire emergency oor 2 Fire emergency oor 2 0 -
☆
F8-14
HCB communication 
setting
Bit4: Energy saving of 
HCB communication
0 -
☆
F8-16
Start address of hall 
call auxiliary command
0–40 0 -
☆
F8-17 Hall call address check 0–1 0 -
☆
Group F9: Time parameters
F9-00
Idle time before 
returning to base oor
0–240 10 min
☆
F9-01
Time for fan and lamp 
to be turned off
0–240 2 min
☆
F9-02
Motor running time 
limit
0–45 45 s
★
F9-03 Clock: year 2000–2100
Current 
year
YYYY
☆
F9-04 Clock: month 1–12
Current 
month
MM
☆
F9-05 Clock: day 1–31
Current 
day
DD
☆
F9-06 Clock: hour 0–23
Current 
hour
HH
☆
F9-07 Clock: minute 0–59
Current 
minute
MM
☆
F9-09
Accumulative running 
time
0–65535 0 h
●
F9-11
High byte of running 
times
0–9999 0 -
●
F9-12
Low byte or running 
times
0–9999 0 -
●





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 123 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Group FA: Keypad setting parameters
FA-00
Keypad display 
selection
0: Reversed display of 
physical oor
1: Positive display of 
physical oor
2: Reversed display of 
hall call oor
3: Positive display of hall 
call oor
3 -
☆
FA-01
Display in running 
state
1–65535 65535 -
☆
FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 65535 -
☆
FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0
Degree 
(°)
●
FA-05
Control board software 
(ZK)
0–65535 0 -
●
FA-06
Drive board software 
(DSP)
0–65535 0 -
●
FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C
●
FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 %
●
FA-12 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 -
●
FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-14 Set speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V
●
FA-17 Present position 0.00–300.0 0 m
●
FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A
●
FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz
●
FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A
●
FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V
●
FA-22 Output torque 0–100 0 %
●
FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW
●





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 124 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-24
Communication 
interference
0–65535 0 -
●
FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-33 Car input state 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-34 Car output state 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-35 Hall sate 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-36 System state 1 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-37 System state 2 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-46
Hall call 
communication state 1
0–65535 (oors 1–16) 0 -
●
FA-47
Hall call 
communication state 2
0–65535 (oors 17–32) 0 -
●
FA-48
Hall call 
communication state 3
0–65535 (oors 33–40) 0 -
●
Group FB: Door function parameters
Fb-00
Number of door 
machine(s)
1–2 1 -
☆
Fb-01 CTB software 00–999 0 -
●
Fb-02
Service oors 1 of door 
machine 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-03
Service oors 2 of door 
machine 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-04
Service oors 1 of door 
machine 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-05
Service oors 2 of door 
machine 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-06
Door open protection 
time
5–99 10 s
☆
Fb-07
Arrival gong output 
delay
0–1000 0 ms
☆
Fb-08
Door close protection 
time
5–99 15 s
☆
Fb-09 Door re-open times 0–20 0 -
☆





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 125 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-10
Door state of standby 
elevator
0: Closing the door as 
normal at base oor
1: Waiting with door 
open at base oor
2: Waiting with door 
open at each oor
0 -
☆
Fb-11
Door open holding 
time for hall call
1–1000 5 s
☆
Fb-12
Door open holding 
time for car call
1–1000 3 s
☆
Fb-13
Door open holding 
time at base oor
1–1000 10 s
☆
Fb-14 Door open delay 10–1000 30 s
☆
Fb-15
Special door open 
holding time
10–1000 30 s
☆
Fb-16
Manual door open 
holding time
1–60 5 s
☆
Fb-17
Holding time for forced 
door close
5–180 120 s
☆
Fb-18
Service oors 3 of door 
machine 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-19
Service oors 3 of door 
machine 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Group FC: Protection function parameters
FC-00
Program control for 
protection function
Bit0: Short-circuit to 
ground detection at 
power-on
Bit2: Decelerating to stop 
at valid light curtain
Bit9: Mode without door 
open/close limit
0 -
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 126 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-01
Program control 2 for 
protection function
Bit0: Overload protection
Bit1: Canceling 
protection at output 
phase loss
Bit2: Canceling over-
modulation function
Bit4: Light curtain 
judgment at door close 
limit
Bit5: Canceling SPI 
communication judgment
Bit14: Canceling 
protection at input phase 
loss
65 -
★
FC-02
Overload protection 
coefcient
0.50–10.00 1.00 -
★
FC-03
Overload pre-warning 
coefcient
50–100 80 %
★
FC-04
Opposite door 
selection
0–3 0 -
★
FC-06 Designated fault 0–99 0 -
☆
FC-07 Designated fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-08
Designated fault 
subcode
0–65535 0 -
●
FC-09
Designated fault month 
and day
0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-10
Designated fault hour 
and minute
0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
FC-11
Logic information of 
designated fault
0–65535 0 -
●
FC-12
Curve information of 
designated fault
0–65535 0 -
●
FC-13
Set speed upon 
designated fault
0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FC-14
Feedback speed upon 
designated fault
0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FC-15
Bus voltage upon 
designated fault
0.0–999.9 0 v
●
FC-16
Current position upon 
designated fault
0.0–300.0 0 m
●
FC-17
Output current upon 
designated fault
0.0–999.9 0 A
●





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 127 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-18
Output frequency upon 
designated fault
0.00–99.99 0 Hz
●
FC-19
Torque current upon 
designated fault
0.0–999.9 0 A
●
FC-20 1st fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-21 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-22
1st fault month and 
day
0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-23
1st fault hour and 
minute
0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
FC-24 2nd fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-25 2nd fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-26
2nd fault month and 
day
0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-27
2nd fault hour and 
minute
0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
FC-28 3rd fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-29 3rd fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-30
3rd fault month and 
day
0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-31
3rd fault hour and 
minute
0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
FC-32 4th fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-33 4th fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-34
4th fault month and 
day
0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-35
4th fault hour and 
minute
0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
···
●
FC-56 10th fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-57 10th fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-58
10th fault month and 
day
0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-59
10th fault hour and 
minute
0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
FC-60 Latest fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-61 Latest fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 128 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-62
Latest fault month and 
day
0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-63
Latest fault hour and 
minute
0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
FC-64
Logic information of 
latest fault
0–65535 0 -
●
FC-65
Curve information of 
latest fault
0–65535 0 -
●
FC-66
Set speed upon latest 
fault
0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FC-67
Feedback speed upon 
latest fault
0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FC-68
Bus voltage upon 
latest fault
0.0–999.9 0 v
●
FC-69
Current position upon 
latest fault
0.0–300.0 0 m
●
FC-70
Output current upon 
latest fault
0–999.9 0 A
●
FC-71
Output frequency upon 
latest fault
0.00–99.99 0 Hz
●
FC-72
Torque current upon 
latest fault
0.0–999.9 0 A
●
Group Fd: Communication parameters
FD-00 Baud rate
0: 9600
1: 38400
0 bit/s
★
FD-02 Local address
0–127
0: Broadcast address
1 -
★
FD-03
Communication 
response delay
0–20 10 ms
★
FD-04
Communication 
timeout
0.0–60.0 0.0 s
★
FD-05 Re-leveling stop delay 0.00–2.00 0.00 s
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 129 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FD-07 HCB:JP1 input
0: Reserved
NO/NC input: 
1/33: Elevator lock signal 
2/34: Fire emergency 
signal
3/35: Current oor 
forbidden
4/36: VIP oor signal
5/37: Security oor 
signal
6/38: Door close button 
input
1 -
★
FD-08 HCB:JP2 input 2 -
★
FD-09 HCB:JP1 output
0: Invalid 
1: Up arrival indicator
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop 
output
5: Non-service state 
output
6: Door close button 
indicator output
1 -
★
FD-10 HCB:JP2 output 2 -
★
FD-11 HCB-B:JP1 input
0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
1/33: Light-load signal
2/34: Half-load signal 
3/35: Door 2 selection 
4/36: Door 2 restricted 
(back door forbidden)
5/37: Door 1 safety edge
6/38: Door 2 safety edge 
7/39: Single/double door 
selection
0 -
★
FD-12 HCB-B:JP2 input 0 -
★
FD-13 HCB-B:JP3 input 0 -
★
FD-14 HCB-B:JP4 input 0 -
★
FD-15 HCB-B:JP5 input 0 -
★
FD-16 HCB-B:JP6 input 0 -
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 130 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FD-17 HCB-B:A1 output
0: Reserved
1: Fault output
2: Non-door zone stop 
output
3: Non-service state 
output
4: Fire emergency output
5: Power failure 
emergency output
6: Door lock valid
7: Night output signal
0 -
★
FD-18 HCB-B:A2 output 0 -
★
FD-19 HCB-B:B1 output 0 -
★
FD-20 HCB-B:B2 output 0 -
★
FD-21 HCB-B:C1 output 0 -
★
FD-22 HCB-B:C2 output 0 -
★
FD-23 HCB-B:C3 output 0 -
★
FD-24 HCB-B:C4 output 0 -
★
FD-25 HCB-B:C5 output 0 -
★
FD-26 HCB-B:C6 output 0 -
★
Group FE: Elevator function parameters
FE-00
Collective selective 
mode
0: Full collective 
selective
1: Down collective 
selective
2: Up collective selective
0 -
★
FE-01 Floor 1 display
The two high digits 
indicate the display code 
of the ten's digit, and the 
two low digits indicate 
the display code of the 
unit's digit.
00: Display "0"
01: Display "1"
02: Display "2"
03: Display "3"
04: Display "4"
05: Display "5"
06: Display "6"
07: Display "7"
08: Display "8"
09: Display "9"
10: Display "A"
11: Display "B"
12: Display "G"
13: Display "H"
14: Display "L"
15: Display "M"
16: Display "P"
(To be continued)
1901 -
☆
FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 -
☆
FE-03 Floor 3 display 1903 -
☆
FE-04 Floor 4 display 1904 -
☆
FE-05 Floor 5 display 1905 -
☆
FE-06 Floor 6 display 1906 -
☆





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 131 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-07 Floor 7 display
17: Display "R"
18: Display "-"
19: No display 
20: Display "12"
21: Display "13"
22: Display "23"
23: Display "C"
24: Display "D"
25: Display "E"
26: Display "F"
27: Display "I"
28: Display "J"
29: Display "K"
30: Display "N"
31: Display "O"
32: Display "Q"
33: Display "S"
34: Display "T"
35: Display "U"
36: Display "V"
37: Display "W"
38: Display "X"
39: Display "Y"
40: Display "Z"
41: Display "15"
42: Display "17"
43: Display "19"
(End)
1907 -
☆
FE-08 Floor 8 display 1908 -
☆
FE-09 Floor 9 display 1909 -
☆
FE-10 Floor 10 display 0100 -
☆
FE-11 Floor 11 display 0101 -
☆
FE-12 Floor 12 display 0102 -
☆
FE-13 Floor 13 display 0103 -
☆
FE-14 Floor 14 display 0104 -
☆
FE-15 Floor 15 display 0105 -
☆
Floor 16 to oor 30 display
FE-31 Floor 31 display 0301 -
☆
FE-35 Floor 32 display 0 -
☆
FE-36 Floor 33 display 0 -
☆
FE-37 Floor 34 display 0 -
☆
FE-38 Floor 35 display 0 -
☆
FE-39 Floor 36 display 0 -
☆
FE-40 Floor 37 display 0 -
☆
FE-41 Floor 38 display 0 -
☆
FE-42 Floor 39 display 0 -
☆
FE-43 Floor 40 display 0 -
☆
FE-52 Highest digit selection 1 0 -
☆
FE-53 Highest digit selection 2 0 -
☆
FE-54 Highest digit selection 3 0 -
☆
FE-55 Highest digit selection 4 0 -
☆
FE-56 Highest digit selection 5 0 -
☆





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 132 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-32
Elevator function 
selection 1
Bit2: Re-leveling function
Bit3: Door pre-open 
function
Bit4: Stuck hall call 
cancellation
Bit5: Night security oor 
function
Bit6: Down collective 
selective peak service
Bit7: Parallel peak 
service
Bit8: Time-based service 
oor function
Bit9: VIP function
Bit11: Car call deletion
Bit12: Hall call deletion
Bit15: Door lock short-
circuit detection
34816 -
☆
FE-33
Elevator function 
selection 2
Bit1: Door open holding 
at open limit
Bit2: Door close 
command not output 
upon door close limit
Bit4: Auto reset for RUN 
and brake contactor 
stuck
Bit5: Slow-down switch 
stuck detection
Bit7: Forced door close
Bit8: NO shorting motor 
stator contactor
Bit9: Immediate stop 
upon re-leveling
Bit13: High-speed 
elevator protection 
function
Bit15: Opposite door 
independent control
36 -
☆
Group Fr: Leveling adjustment parameters
Fr-00
Leveling adjustment 
function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 -
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                         Function Code Table

- 133 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fr-01
Leveling adjustment 
record 1
00000–60060
30030 mm
★
Fr-02
Leveling adjustment 
record 2
30030 mm
★
… …
Fr-20
Leveling adjustment 
record 20
30030 mm
★
Group FF: Factory parameters
Group FP: User parameters
FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 -
☆
FP-01 Parameter update
0: No operation
1: Restore default 
settings
2: Clear fault records
0 -
★
FP-02
User-dened 
parameter display
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0 -
★





Function Code Table                                                                                         NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 134 -





7
Description of Function Codes





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 136 -
Chapter 7 Description of Function Codes
Group F0: Basic Parameters
Function 
Code
Parameter 
Name
Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-00
Control 
mode
 
•
0: Sensorless ux vector 
control (SFVC)
 
•
1: Closed-loop vector control 
(CLVC)
 
•
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) 
control
1 -
★
It is used to set the control mode of the system.
 
•
0: Sensorless ux vector control (SFVC)
It is applicable to low-speed running during no-load commissioning of the asynchronous 
motor, fault judgment at inspection, and synchronous motor running on special 
conditions.
 
•
1: Closed-loop vector control (CLVC)
It is applicable to normal running in distance control.
 
•
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
It is applicable to equipment detection where the ratio between the voltage and the 
frequency is xed, control is simple, and the low-frequency output torque feature is poor.
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-01
Command source 
selection
0: Operation panel control
1: Distance control
1 - ★
It is used to set the source of running commands and running speed references.
 
•
0: Operation panel control
The controller is operated by pressing 

RUN

 and 

STOP
RES

 on the operation panel, and 
the running speed is set by F0-02 (Running speed under operation panel control). This 
method is applicable only to the test or motor no-load auto-tuning.
 
•
1: Distance control
This method is used in the NICE series integrated elevator controller. During inspection, 
the elevator runs at the speed set in F3-11. During normal running, the controller 
automatically calculates the speed and running curve for the elevator based on the 
distance between the current oor and the target oor within the rated elevator speed, 
implementing direct stop.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 137 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-02
Running speed under 
operation panel control
0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s
☆
It is used to set the running speed in the operation panel control mode.
Note that this function is enabled only when F0-01 is set to 0 (Operation panel control). You 
can change the running speed of the elevator by modifying this parameter during running
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-03 Maximum running speed 0.250 to F0-04 1.600 m/s
★
It is used to set the actual maximum running speed of the elevator. The value must be 
smaller than the rated elevator speed.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-04 Rated elevator speed
0.250–4.000 1.600 m/s ★
It is used to set the norminal rated speed of the elevator. The value of this parameter is 
dependent on the elevator mechanism and traction motor.

Note

F0-03 is the actual running speed within the elevator speed range set in F0-04. For example, for a 
certain elevator, if F0-04 is 1.750 m/s and the actually required maximum running speed is 1.600 
m/s, set F0-03 to 1.600 m/s.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-05 Rated elevator load 300–9999 1000 kg
★
It is used to set the rated elevator load. This parameter is used for the anti-nuisance 
function.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-06 Maximum frequency 20.00–99.00 50.00
Hz ★
It is used to set the maximum output frequency of the system. This value must be larger 
than the rated motor frequency.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F0-07 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0
kHz ★
It is used to set the carrier frequency of the controller.
The carrier frequency is closely related to the motor noise during running. When it is 
generally set above 6 kHz, mute running is achieved. It is recommended to set the carrier 
frequency to the lowest within the allowable noise, which reduces the controller loss and 
radio frequency interference.
 
•
If the carrier frequency is low, output current has high harmonics, and the power loss 
and temperature rise of the motor increase.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 138 -
 
•
If the carrier frequency is high, power loss and temperature rise of the motor declines. 
However, the system has an increase in power loss, temperature rise and interference.
Adjusting the  carrier frequency will  exert inuences  on the aspects listed in the following 
table.
Table 7-1 Inuences of carrier frequency adjustment
Carrier frequency
Low High
Motor noise
Large Small
Output current waveform
Bad Good
Motor temperature rise
High Low
Controller temperature rise
Low High
Leakage current
Small Large
External radiation interference
Small Large

Note

On certain environment conditions (the heatsink temperature is too high), the system will reduce 
the carrier frequency to provide overheat protection for the controller, preventing the controller 
from being damaged due to overheat. If the temperature cannot reduce in this case, the controller 
reports the overheat fault.
Group F1: Motor Parameter
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-00 Encoder type
0: SIN/COS encoder
1: UVW encoder
2: ABZ incremental encoder
0 - ★
It is used to set the encoder type matching the motor.
When F1-25 is set to 1 (Synchronous motor), set this parameter correctly before auto-
tuning; otherwise, the motor cannot run properly.
When F1-25 is set to 0 (Asynchronous motor), this parameter is automatically changed to 2. 
You need not modify it manually.
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-01 Rated motor power 0.7–75.0
Model 
dependent
kW ★
F1-02 Rated motor voltage 0–600
Model 
dependent
V
★
F1-03 Rated motor current 0.00–655.00
Model 
dependent
A
★
F1-04
Rated motor 
frequency
0.00–99.00
Model 
dependent
Hz
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 139 -
Function 
Code
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-05
Rated motor rotational 
speed
0–3000
Model 
dependent
RPM
★
Set these parameters according to the motor nameplate.
Ensure that these motor parameters are set correctly. Incorrect setting affects the motor 
auto-tuning and the vector control effect.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-06
Encoder initial angle 
(synchronous motor)
0.0–359.9 0
Degree 
(°)
★
F1-07
Encoder angle at power-
off (synchronous motor)
0.0–359.9 0
Degree 
(°)
★
F1-08
Synchronous motor 
wiring mode
0–15 0 -
★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning.
F1-06 species the encoder angle at zero point. After multiple times of auto-tuning, compare 
the obtained values, and the value deviation of F1-06 shall be within ±5°.
F1-07 species the angle of the magnetic pole when the motor is powered off. The value is 
recorded at power-off and is used for comparison at next power-on.
F1-08 species the motor wiring mode, that is, whether the output phase sequence of the 
drive board is consistent with the UVW phase sequence of the motor. If the value obtained 
by means of no-load auto-tuning is an even number, the phase sequence is correct. If the 
value is an odd number, the sequence is incorrect; in this case, exchange any two of UWW 
phases of the motor.

Note

With-load auto-tuning of the synchronous motor can be performed only when the UVW phase 
sequence of the motor is consistent with the output phase sequence of the controller.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-09
Current lter time 
(synchronous motor)
0–40 0
- ★
It is used to set the current lter time, which suppress the periodic vertical jitter. Increase the 
value in ascending order of 3 to achieve the optimum effect.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-10 Encoder verication selection 0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to set encoder signal verication. This parameter is set by the manufacturer, and 
you need not modify it generally.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 140 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
3: Shaft auto-tuning
0 - ★
It is used to select the auto-tuning mode.
"With-load auto-tuning" is static auto-tuning for  the asynchronous  motor and  rotary auto-
tuning for the synchronous motor. "No-load auto-tuning" is complete auto-tuning, by which 
all motor parameters can be obtained.
When F1-11 is set to 2 (No-load auto-tuning), the motor must be completely disconnected 
from the load; otherwise, the auto-tuning effect will be affected. When TUNE is displayed on 
the operation panel, you need to manually release the brake before starting auto-tuning. For 
details on the auto-tuning process, see the description in section 5.1.3.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-12 Encoder pulses per revolution 0–10000 2048 PPR ★
It is used to set the pulses per revolution of the encoder (according to the encoder 
nameplate).
This parameter is critical to CLVC. Set the encoder nominal value in this parameter. 
Otherwise, the elevator may not run properly. When the feedback pulses received by the 
system is data after frequency division by other equipment, set the frequency-division value 
rather than the encoder nominal value in this parameter. For example, if the pulses per 
revolution of the encoder is 8192 and is sent to the system after 1/4 frequency division, set 
this parameter to 2048 (8192/4 = 2048).

Note

F0-04 (Rated elevator speed), F1-05 (Rated motor rotational speed), and F1-12 (Encoder pulses 
per revolution) determine whether the elevator can run properly. If any of these parameters is 
changed, shaft auto-tuning must be performed again.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-13
Encoder wire-breaking 
detection time
0–10.0 1.0 s ★
This parameter is used to set the time that a wire-break fault lasts before being detected.
After the elevator starts running at non-zero speed, if there is no encoder signal input within 
the time set in this parameter, the system prompts the encoder fault and stops running. 
When the value is smaller than 0.5s, this function is disabled.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-14
Stator resistance 
(asynchronous motor)
0.000–30.000
Model 
dependent
Ω
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 141 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-15
Rotor resistance 
(asynchronous motor)
0.000–30.000
Model 
dependent
Ω
★
F1-16
Leakage inductance 
(asynchronous motor)
0.00–300.00
Model 
dependent
mH
★
F1-17
Mutual inductance 
(asynchronous motor)
0.1–3000.0
Model 
dependent
mH
★
F1-18
Magnetizing current 
(asynchronous motor)
0.01–300.00
Model 
dependent
A
★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. After the motor auto-tuning 
is completed successfully, the values of these parameters are updated automatically. 
If motor auto-tuning cannot be performed onsite, manually enter the values by referring to 
data of the motor with the same nameplate parameters.
Each time F1-01 (Rated motor power) of the asynchronous motor is modified, these 
parameters automatically resume to the default values for the standard motor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-19 Shaft Q inductance (torque) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH
★
F1-20 Shaft D inductance (excitation) 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH
★
F1-21 Back EMF 0–65535 0 -
★
These parameters are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F1-25 Motor type
0: Asynchronous motor
1: Synchronous motor
1 - ★
It is used to set the motor type. This parameter must be set correctly before motor auto-
tuning; otherwise, the motor auto-tuning cannot be performed. 
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-00 Speed loop proportional gain KP1 0–100 40 -
★
F2-01 Speed loop integral time TI1 0.01–10.00 0.60 s
★
F2-02 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz
★
F2-00 and F2-01 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is smaller than 
the value of F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-03 Speed loop proportional gain KP2 0–100 35 -
★
F2-04 Speed loop integral time TI2 0.01–10.00 0.80 s
★
F2-05 Switchover frequency 2 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz
★





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 142 -
F2-03 and F2-04 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is larger than the 
value of F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2).
If the running frequency is between F2-02 and F2-05, the speed loop PI parameters are 
obtained from the weighted average value of the two groups of PI parameters (F2-00, F2-01 
and F2-03, F2-04), as shown in Figure 7-1.
Figure 7-1 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters

Frequency 
reference
PI 
parameters
F2-00
F2-01
F2-03
F2-04
F2-02 (Switchover 
frequency 1)
F2-05 (Switchover 
frequency 2)

The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the 
proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator.
To achieve a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral 
time. Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation.
The recommended adjustment method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot meet the requirements, make proper adjustment. Increase the 
proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate, and then reduce the 
integral time to ensure that the system has quick response and small overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are 0, only F2-
03 and F2-04 are valid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-06 Current loop KP1 (torque) 10–500 60 -
★
F2-07 Current loop KI1 (torque) 10–500 30 -
★
These two parameters are regulation parameters for the torque axis current loop.
These parameters are used as the torque axis current regulator in vector control. The best 
values of the parameters matching the motor characteristics are obtained by means of 
motor auto-tuning. You need not modify them generally.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 150.0 %
★
It is used to set the torque upper limit of the motor. The value 100% corresponds to the rated 
output torque of the adaptable motor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-10 Elevator running direction 0–3 0 -
★





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 143 -
It is used to set the elevator running direction.
The values are as follows:
 
•
0: Running direction and position pulse direction unchanged
 
•
1: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction reversed
 
•
2: Running direction unchanged, position pulse direction reversed
 
•
3: Running direction reversed, position pulse direction unchanged
You can modify this parameter to reverse the running direction (without changing the wiring 
of the motor) and position pulse direction (pulse direction for determining the elevator 
position in F4-03). 
For example, if inspection on the up direction needs to be performed after the elevator is 
installed, but the elevator is in down direction, you need to reverse the running direction; if 
the pulses indicated by F4-03 decrease (that is, down direction) during inspection up, you 
need to reverse the position pulse direction.
The correct directions are as follows:
During inspection up, the car moves upward, and the pulses indicated by F4-03 increase; 
during inspection down, the car moves downward, and the pulses indicated by F4-03 
decrease.
Pay attention to the setting of this parameter when restoring the default setting.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-11 Zero servo current coefcient 0.20–50.0 15 %
★
F2-12 Zero servo speed loop KP 0.00–2.00 0.5 -
★
F2-13 Zero servo speed loop KI 0.00–2.00 0.6 -
★
These parameters are used to adjust automatic pre-torque compensation in the case of no-
load-cell. The no-load-cell startup function is enabled when F8-01 is set to 2.
Decrease the values of these parameters in the case of car lurch at startup, and increase 
the values in the case of rollback at startup. For details, see the description of section 5.1.5.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-16 Torque acceleration time 1–500 1 ms
★
F2-17 Torque deceleration time 1–500 350 ms
★
These two parameters are used to set the acceleration time and deceleration time of the 
torque current.
Due to different characteristics, the motor may have an abnormal sound when the current 
is withdrawn at stop. In this case, you can increase the torque deceleration time properly to 
eliminate the abnormal sound.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F2-18 Startup acceleration time 0.000–1.500 0.000 s
★
It is used to set the acceleration time of the startup speed. It is used with F3-00. For details, 
see Figure 7-2.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 144 -
Group F3: Running Control Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.030 0.000 m/s
★
F3-01 Startup holding time 0.000–0.500 0.000 s
★
These two parameters are used to set the startup speed and startup speed holding time. 
For details, see Figure 7-2.
The parameters may reduce the terrace feeling at startup due to static friction between the 
guide rail and the guide shoes.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s
2
★
F3-03 Acceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s
★
F3-04 Acceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s
★
These parameters are used to set the running curve during acceleration of the elevator.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–2.000 0.600 m/s
2
★
F3-06 Deceleration end jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s
★
F3-07 Deceleration start jerk time 0.300–4.000 2.500 s
★
These parameters are used to set the running curve during deceleration of the elevator.
 
•
F3-02 (F3-05) is the acceleration rate (deceleration rate) in the straight-line acceleration 
process (deceleration process) of the S curve.
 
•
F3-03 (F3-07) is the time for the rate to increase from 0 to the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) 
in the end jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
 
•
F3-04 (F3-06) is the time for the rate to decrease from the value set in F3-02 (F3-05) to 0 
in the start jerk segment of the S curve. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk is.
Figure 7-2 Setting the running curve

 
t (time)
V (speed)
F3-04
F3-02
F3-03
F3-09
F3-07
F3-05
F3-06
F2-18
F3-00
F3-01





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 145 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-08 Special deceleration rate 0.500–2.000 0.900 m/s
2
★
It is used to set the deceleration rate in elevator slow-down, inspection, and shaft auto-tuning.
This parameter is not used during normal running. It is used only when the elevator position 
is abnormal or the slow-down signal is abnormal, preventing over travel top terminal or over 
travel bottom terminal.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-09 Pre-deceleration distance 0–90.0 0.0 mm
★
It is used to set the pre-deceleration distance of the elevator in distance control, as shown 
in Figure 7-2. This function is to eliminate the effect of encoder signal loss or leveling signal 
delay.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.000–0.080 0.040 m/s
★
 is used to set the elevator speed during re-leveling.
This parameter is valid only when the pre-open module (MCTC-SCB-A) is added to 
implement the re-leveling function (set in FE-32).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.630 0.250 m/s
★
It is used to set the elevator speed during inspection and shaft auto-tuning.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-12 Position of up slow-down 1  0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-13 Position of down slow-down 1 0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-14 Position of up slow-down 2
0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-15
Position of down slow-down 2 0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-16 Position of up slow-down 3 0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
F3-17 Position of down slow-down 3 0.000–300.00 0.00 m
★
These parameters specify the positions of all slow-down switches relative to the bottom 
leveling position, and the positions are automatically recorded during shaft auto-tuning. For 
the installation positions of the slow-down switches, see the description of section 3.8.2.
The NICE3000
new 
integrated elevator controller supports a maximum of three pairs of slow-
down switches. From two sides of the shaft to the middle, slow-down 1, slow-down 2, and 
slow-down 3 are installed in order; that is, slow-down 1 is installed near the terminal oor. 
There may be only one pair of slow-sown switches for the low-speed elevator, and two or 
three pairs of slow-down switches for the high-speed elevator. 
The system automatically detects the speed when the elevator reaches a slow-down switch. 
If the detected speed or position is abnormal, the system enables the elevator to slow down 
at the special deceleration rate set in F3-08, preventing over travel top terminal or over 
travel bottom terminal.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 146 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-18 Zero-speed control time at startup 0.000–1.000 0.200 s
★
F3-19 Brake release delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s
★
F3-20 Zero-speed control time at end 0.200–1.500 0.200 s
★
These parameters are used to set the time related to the zero-speed holding current output 
and braking action delay.
 
•
F3-18 (Zero-speed control time at startup) species the time from output of the RUN 
contactor to output of the brake contactor, during which the controller performs excitation 
on the motor and outputs zero-speed current with large startup torque.
 
•
F3-19 (Brake release delay) species the time from the moment when the system sends 
the brake release command to the moment when the brake is completely released, 
during which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
 
•
F3-20 (Zero-speed control time at end) species the zero-speed output time when the 
running curve ends.
 
•
F8-11 (Brake apply delay) species the time from the moment when the system sends 
the brake apply command to the moment when the brake is completely applied, during 
which the system retains the zero-speed torque current output.
Figure 7-3 Running time sequence

 
V (speed)
t (time)
F3-18
F3-19
F8-11
F3-20
300 ms
RUN contactor
Brake contactor
Shorting door lock 
circuit contactor
Shorting motor 
stator contactor
Internal running 
status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor 
feedback
Shorting door lock circuit 
contactor feedback
Shorting motor stator 
contactor

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F3-21 Low-speed re-leveling speed 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s
★
It is used to set the elevator speed of returning to the leveling position at normal non-leveling 
stop.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 147 -
Group F4: Floor Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-00 Leveling adjustment 0–60 30 mm
★
It is used to adjust the leveling accuracy at elevator stop. If over-leveling occurs in elevator 
stop at all oors, decrease the value of this parameter properly. If under-leveling occurs in 
elevator stop at all oors, increase the value of this parameter properly. 
This parameter takes effect to leveling of all oors. Therefore, if leveling at a single oor is 
inaccurate, adjust the position of the leveling plate.
The NICE3000
new
 has the advanced distance control algorithm and adopts many methods to 
ensure reliability of direct stop. Generally you need not modify this parameter.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-01 Current oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
This parameter indicates the current oor of the elevator car.
The system automatically changes the value of this parameter during running, and corrects 
it at leveling position (door open limit) after the up slow-down and down slow-down switches 
act. At non-bottom oor and top-oor leveling, you can also manually modify this parameter, 
but the value must be consistent with the actual current oor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-02 High byte of current oor position 0–65535 1 Pulses
●
F4-03 Low byte of current oor position 0–65535 34464 Pulses
●
These two parameters indicate the absolute pulses of the current position of the elevator car 
relative to the bottom leveling position.
The position data of the NICE3000
new
 in the shaft is recorded in pulses. Each position is 
expressed by a 32-bit binary number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the 
oor position, and the low 16 bits indicate the low byte of the oor position.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-04 Length 1 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 mm
★
F4-05 Length 2 of leveling plate 0–65535 0 mm
★
These two parameters respectively indicate the pulses corresponding to the length of 
the magnetic value and the length between two leveling sensors. They are automatically 
recorded during shaft auto-tuning.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F4-06 High byte of oor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-07 Low byte of oor height 1 0–65535 0 Pulses
★
…(Floor height 2 to oor height 38)
F4-82 High byte of oor height 39 0–65535 0 Pulses
★
F4-83 Low byte of oor height 39 0–65535 0 Pulses
★





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 148 -
These parameters indicate the pulses corresponding to the floor height i (between the 
leveling plates of oor n and oor i+1).  Each oor  height is  expressed by  a 32-bit  binary 
number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the oor height, and the low 16 bits 
indicate the low byte of the oor height. On normal conditions, the oor height i of each oor 
is almost the same.
Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-00
Attendant/Automatic 
switchover time
3–200 3 s
★
If there is a hall  call at current oor in attendant state, the system automatically switches 
over to the automatic (normal) state after the time set in this parameter. After this running is 
completed, the system automatically restores to the attendant state (BIT2 of F6-43 must be 
set to 1). When the value of this parameter is smaller than 5, this function is disabled, and 
the system is in the normal attendant state.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-01 X1 function selection
0–127
33 -
★
F5-02 X2 function selection 35 -
★
F5-03 X3 function selection 34 -
★
… ···
F5-23 X23 function selection 00 -
★
F5-24 X24 function selection 00 -
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of input terminals X1 to X24.

Note

Functions 04/36 (Safety circuit feedback NO/NC input), 05/37 (Door lock circuit feedback NO/NC 
input), 06/38 (Main contactor feedback NO/NC input), 07/39 (Brake feedback contactor NO/NC 
input), 26/58 (Brake contactor feedback 2 NO/NC input) can be repeatedly allocated to the input 
terminals.
Terminals X1 to X24 are digital inputs, and are allocated with corresponding functions based 
on the input signals. All these terminals share the COM terminal. After the 24 V voltage is 
input, the corresponding input terminal indicator becomes ON. The functions are described 
as follows: 
00: Invalid
Even if there is signal input to the terminal, the system has no response. You can allocate 
this function to terminals that are not used to prevent mis-function.
01: Up leveling signal  02: Down leveling signal 03: Door zone signal
The NICE3000
new
 system determines the elevator leveling position based on the leveling 
sensor signal. The system supports three types of leveling conguration: single door zone 
sensor, up/down leveling sensor, and door zone sensor plus the up/down leveling sensor.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 149 -
If three leveling sensors are used, the system receives the up leveling signal, door zone 
signal, and down leveling signal in sequence in the up direction, and receives down leveling 
signal, door zone signal, and up leveling signal in sequence in the down direction. 
If two leveling sensors (up leveling sensor and down leveling sensor) are used, the system 
receives the up leveling signal and down leveling signal in sequence in the up direction, and 
receives down leveling signal and up leveling signal in sequence in the down direction.
If the leveling signal is abnormal (stuck or unavailable), the system reports fault Err22.
04: Safety circuit feedback signal 05: Door lock circuit feedback signal 
29: Safety circuit 2 feedback signal  31:  Door  lock  circuit  2  feedback 
signal
The safety circuit is important to safe and reliable running of the elevator, and the door lock 
circuit ensures that the hall door and car door are closed before the elevator starts to run. 
Valid feedback signals of the safety circuit and door lock circuit are necessary to elevator 
running.
It is recommended that these signals are set to NO input. If they are set to NC input, the 
system considers the input active even though there is no input. In this case, the actual state 
of the safety circuit cannot be detected, which may cause potential safety risks. 
06: RUN contactor feedback signal  07:  Brake  contactor  feedback 
signal  26: Brake contactor feedback 2 signal
The system sends commands to the RUN and brake contactors and automatically detects 
the feedback from the RUN and brake contactors. If the commands and the feedback are 
inconsistent, the system reports a fault.
08: Inspection signal  09: Inspection up signal  1 0 :   I n s p e c t i o n   d o w n 
signal
When the Automatic/Inspection switch is set to the Inspection position, the elevator enters 
the inspection state; in this case, the system cancels all automatic running including the 
automatic door operations. When the inspection up signal or inspection down signal is valid, 
the elevator runs at the inspection speed.
11: Fire emergency signal
When the re emergency switch is turned on, the elevator enters the re emergency state, 
and immediately cancels the registered hall calls and car calls. The elevator stops at the 
nearest oor without opening the door, and then directly runs to the re emergency oor and 
automatically opens the door after arrival.
12: Up limit signal  13: Down limit signal
The up limit signal and down limit signal are used as the stop switches at the terminal oor 
to prevent over travel top terminal or over travel bottom terminal when the elevator runs over 
the leveling position of the terminal oor but does not stop.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 150 -
14: Overload signal
When the elevator load exceeds 110% of the rated load during normal use, the elevator 
enters the overload state. Then the overload buzzer beeps, the overload indicator in the 
car becomes ON, and the elevator door keeps open. The overload signal becomes invalid 
when the door lock is applied. If the running with 110% of the rated load is required during 
inspection, you can set F7-06 to 1 to allow overload running (note that this function has 
potential safety risks and use it with caution). 
It is recommended that the overload signal be set to NC input. If it is set to NO, the system 
cannot detect the overload state when the overload switch is damaged or the connection 
is broken, and the elevator running in this case may cause potential safety risks. It is also 
recommended that the up limit signal, down limit signal, and slow-down signal are set to NC.
15: Full-load signal
When the elevator load is 80% to 110% of the rated load, the HOP displays the full-load state, and 
the elevator does not respond to hall calls.

Note

 
When terminal X on the MCB is used for input of the overload and full-load signals, ensure that 
F5-36 has been set to 0.
 
16: Up slow-down 1 signal  17: Down slow-down 1 signal
18: Up slow-down 2 signal  19: Down slow-down 2 signal
20: Up slow-down 3 signal  21: Down slow-down 3 signal
The slow-down signals are used to enable the elevator to stop at the slow-down speed when 
the car position is abnormal, which is an important method to guarantee elevator safety. The 
system automatically records the positions of the switches in group F3 during shaft auto-
tuning.
22: Shorting door lock circuit contactor feedback
It is the feedback signal when the door lock circuit is shorted at enabling of the function of 
door pre-open upon arrival or re-leveling at door open for the elevator congured with the 
pre-open module. This is to ensure safety during the elevator running.
23: Fireghter switch signal
It is the firefighter switch signal and is used to enable the firefighter running. After the 
elevator returns to the re emergency oor, the elevator enters the reghter running state if 
the reghter signal is active.
24: Door machine 1 light curtain signal; 25: Door machine 2 light curtain 
signal
They are used to detect the light curtain signals of door machine 1 and door machine 2 (if 
existing).





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 151 -
27: UPS valid signal
It is the emergency running signal at power failure. If it is active, it indicates that the elevator 
is running for emergency evacuation at power failure. For more details, see section 5.2.1.
28: Elevator lock signal
If this signal is active, the elevator enters the locked state, returns to the elevator lock oor 
and does not respond to any calls until the signal becomes inactive. It has the same function 
as the hall call elevator lock signal.
30: Shorting PMSM stator feedback signal
The shorting PMSM stator contactor protects the elevator from falling at high speed in the 
case of brake failure. This signal is used to monitor whether the shorting PMSM stator 
contactor is normal.
65: Door machine 1 safety edge signal; 66: Door machine 2 safety edge 
signal
They are used to detect the safety edge signal state of door machine 1 and door machine 2 
(if existing).
67: Motor overheat signal
If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the controller stops output and reports 
fault Err39 to prompt motor overheat. After this signal becomes inactive, Err39 is reset 
automatically and the system resumes to normal operation.
68: Earthquake signal
If this signal remains active for more than 2s, the elevator enters the earthquake stop state, 
stops at the nearest landing oor and opens the door. Then the elevator starts running again 
after the earthquake signal becomes inactive.
69: Back door forbidden signal
If double door machines are applied, it is used to prohibit the use of door machine 2.
70: Light-load signal
It is used for nuisance judgment in the anti-nuisance function. If Bit2 in F8-08 is set to 1, 
the system performs nuisance judgment by using the light-load switch. 30% of rated load is 
regarded as light load.
71: Half-load signal
It is used for allocation of elevators in parallel or group mode and judgment of the 
emergency running direction at power failure.
72: Fire emergency oor switchover signal
The NICE3000
new 
supports two re  emergency oors. By default, the elevator stops at re 





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 152 -
emergency oor 1 in re emergency state. If this signal is active, the elevator stops at re 
emergency oor 2 in re emergency state.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-25 CTB input type 0–511 320 -
★
It is used to dene the input signal type (NO/NC) of the CTB by binary bit.
For example, the input signal types of the CTB of an elevator are set as follows:
Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default
Bit0 Door machine 1 light curtain 0 Bit5 Door machine 2 close limit 0
Bit1 Door machine 2 light curtain 0 Bit6 Full-load signal (digital) 1
Bit2 Door machine 1 open limit 0 Bit7 Over-load signal (digital) 0
Bit3 Door machine 2 open limit 0 Bit8 Light-load signal (digital) 1
Bit4 Door machine 1 close limit 0 0: NC input; 1: NO input
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-26 Y1 function selection
0–31
1 -
★
F5-27  Y2 function selection 2 -
★
F5-28 Y3 function selection 3 -
★
F5-29 Y4 function selection 4 -
★
F5-30 Y5 function selection 0 -
★
F5-31 Y6 function selection 0 -
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of relay output terminals Y1 to Y6.
00: Invalid
The terminal has no function.
01: RUN contactor control; 02: Brake contactor control; 03: Shorting door 
lock circuit contactor control
The terminal with one of these functions controls whether the contactor is opened or closed.
04: Fire emergency oor arrival signal feedback
In the re emergency state, the system sends the feedback signal for monitoring after the 
elevator stops at the re emergency oor.
05: Door machine 1 open; 06: Door machine 1 close; 07: Door machine 2 
open; 08: Door machine 2 close
The terminal with one of these functions is used to control open/close of door 1/2.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 153 -
09: Brake and RUN contactors healthy
When the brake and RUN contactors operate properly (non-Err36/Err37 state), the system 
sends the feedback signal for monitoring.
10: Fault state
The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the level-3, level-4 or level-5 
fault state.
11: Running monitor
The terminal with the function has output when the controller is running.
12: Shorting PMSM stator contactor
When the shorting PMSM stator contactor is applied in synchronous motor, the terminal with 
the function is used to control whether the contactor is closed or opened. For details, see 
section 5.2.1.
13: Emergency evacuation automatic switchover
When detecting that the bus voltage declines to a certain value after power failure occurs on 
the mains supply, the controller outputs this signal and uses the battery for temporary power 
supply, implementing emergency evacuation running.
Only Y6/M6 can be allocated with this function because the controller needs to depend on 
its residual power to drive the relay at power failure of the mains supply.
14: System healthy
The terminal with the function has output when the system operates properly.
15: Emergency buzzer control
The terminal with the function has output when the system is in the emergency evacuation 
running state. The buzzer tweets to prompt.
16: High-voltage startup of brake
This function is used for the brake that keeps the release state with voltage reduction. The 
terminal with this function keeps the output for 4s to release the brake, and then the voltage 
is reduced to keep the brake release state.
17: Elevator running in up direction
The terminal with the function has output when the elevator runs in the up direction.
18: Lamp/Fan running
It is used for the lamp/fan running output, the same as the energy saving control output of 
the CTB.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 154 -
19: Medical sterilization
It is used to control the output of the ultraviolet sterilizing lamp signal. After the elevator 
stops running and the lamp/fan stops operating, the medical sterilization output is started.
20: Non-door zone stop
The terminal with this function has output when the elevator stops at the non-door zone.
21: Electric lock
It is used to control applying and releasing of the electric lock in the case of manual door.
22: Non-service state
It is output when the elevator is in the non-service state and cannot respond to hall calls.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-32
Communication 
state display
Monitoring of CANbus and 
Modbus communication states
- -
●
It is used to monitor the state of CANbus communication with the CTB and Modbus 
communication with the HOP.
When you enter the menu of F5-32, the LEDs on the operation panel indicate the current 
HOP communication state. The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right.
Figure 7-4 Communication state monitoring

12345
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
Monitoring CANbus 
communication status
 between the CTB and the MCB
Monitoring Modbus communication status 
between the HOPs at all floors and the MCB

Each segment of the LEDs is dened in the following table.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 155 -
Table 7-2 Denition of LED segments
LED 
No.
Corresponding Normal Modbus
Communication Address of LED
Meaning of Segment ON
A B C D E F G DP
HOP Modbus Communication 
Normal
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A
B
C
DP
D
E
F
G

2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Reserved
LED 
No.
Corresponding Abnormal Modbus
Communication Address of LED
Meaning of Segment OFF
A B C D E F G DP
HOP Modbus Communication 
Abnormal
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A
B
C
DP
D
E
F
G

2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Reserved
LED 
No.
CTB CANbus Communication State Number Displayed by the LED
5

Communication status from strong to weak 
Best
 communication status
Communication 
interrupted

A
B
C
DP
D
E
F
G

For example,  if the  LEDs are  shown as  the following gure, it indicates that the Modbus 
communication of addresses 1, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26 and 27 
are abnormal. The Modbus communication of other addresses is normal. The CANbus 
communication state displayed by the LED is 3, indicating normal communication.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 156 -
Figure 7-5 Example of LED display indicating the communication state

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31

Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-33 Terminal program control 0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to set the elevator functions. Whether a function is enabled is indicated by a binary 
bit: "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled. 
The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-3 Functions indicated by bits of F5-33
Bit Function Description Default
Bit3
Elevator re emergency 
requirement for Hong 
Kong
If it is enabled, the re emergency functions in 
F6-44 applied to Hong Kong become enabled 
automatically.
0
Bit4
Arrival gong disabled at 
night
The arrival gong is disabled from 22:00 p.m. to 
7:00 a.m.
0
Bit6
Door lock disconnected at 
inspection switched over 
to normal running
The door lock is additionally disconnected once 
when the inspection state is switched over to the 
normal running state.
0
Bit7
Fault code not displayed 
on the keypad
The keypad does not blink to display the fault code. 0
Bit8
Door open command 
cancelled immediately at 
door open limit
The system immediately cancels the door open 
command after receiving the door open limit.
0
Bit9
Car stop and zero-speed 
torque holding at abnormal 
brake feedback
When the brake feedback is abnormal, the elevator 
arrives at the door-zone position and stops. The 
door keeps closed, and the system holds torque 
output as long as possible. After the system is 
over-loaded, there is no torque output, and the 
elevator may fall in this case. Be cautious of using 
this function.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-34 Terminal state display
Monitoring of I/O terminals 
on MCB
- - ●
F5-35 Terminal state display
Monitoring of I/O terminals 
on CTB, CCB and HOP
- - ●





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 157 -
These parameters are used to monitor the state of all I/O terminals of the system.
The LEDs of F5-34/F5-35 are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right. 
Figure 7-6 Monitoring of all I/O terminals

12345
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
DP

Each segment of the LEDs is dened in the following table.
Table 7-4 Denition of LED segments
F5-34 F5-35
No. Segment Indication No. Segment Indication
1
A -
1
A Light curtain 1
B Up leveling signal B Light curtain 2
C Down leveling signal C Door 1 open limit
D Door zone signal D Door 2 open limit
E Safety circuit feedback 1 E Door 1 close limit
F Door lock circuit feedback 1 F Door 2 close limit
G RUN contactor feedback G Full-load signal
DP Brake contactor feedback 1 DP Overload signal
2
A Inspection signal
2
A Door open button
B Inspection up signal B Door close button
C Inspection down signal C Door open delay button
D Fire emergency signal D Bypass signal
E Up limit signal E Attendant signal
F Down limit signal F Direction change signal
G Overload signal G Independent running signal
DP Full-load signal DP Fireghter operation signal





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 158 -
F5-34 F5-35
No. Segment Indication No. Segment Indication
3
A Up slow-down 1 signal
3
A Door open output 1
B Down slow-down 1 signal B Door close output 1
C Up slow-down 2 signal C Door lock signal
D Down slow-down 2 signal D Door open output 1
E Up slow-down 3 signal E Door close output 2
F Down slow-down 3 signal F Door lock signal
G
Shorting door lock circuit 
contactor feedback
G Up arrival gong
DP Fireghter running signal DP Down arrival gong
4
A Door machine 1 light curtain
4
A Door open button display
B Door machine 2 light curtain B Door close button display
C Brake contactor feedback 2 C Door open delay button display
D UPS input D Non-door zone stop
E Elevator lock input E Reserved
F Safety circuit feedback 2 F Buzzer output
G
Shorting PMSM stator 
contactor feedback
G Reserved
DP Door lock circuit feedback 2 DP Energy saving sign
5
A Reserved
5
A System light curtain state 1
B RUN contactor output B System light curtain state 2
C Brake contactor output C Hall call elevator lock input
D
Shorting door lock circuit 
contactor control
D Hall call re emergency input
E
Fire emergency oor arrival 
signal
E Full-load signal
F - F Over-load signal
DP - DP -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-36 Load cell input selection 0–3 1 -
★
It is used to set the channel of setting the elevator load cell signal. When a load cell device 
is used, set this parameter correctly rst.
The values are as follows:
 
•
0: Invalid
 
•
1: CTB digital input
 
•
2: CTB analog input
 
•
3: MCB analog input





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 159 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F5-37 X25 function selection
0: No function
4: Safety circuit signal
5: Door lock circuit signal
0 -
★
F5-38 X26 function selection 0 -
★
F5-39 X27 function selection 0 -
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of heavy-current detection input terminals 
X25 to X27.
The functions 0, 4, and 5 can be repeatedly allocated to terminals. If X25 to X27 are not 
used, cancel the setting of these parameters.
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-00 Top oor of the elevator F6-01 to 40 9 -
★
F6-01 Bottom oor of the elevator 1 to F6-00 1 -
★
These two parameters are used to set the top floor and bottom floor of the elevator, 
determined by the number of actually installed leveling plates.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-02 Parking oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the value set in F9-00, the elevator returns to the 
parking oor automatically.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-03 Fire emergency oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
When entering the state of returning to the re emergency oor, the elevator returns to this 
oor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-04 Elevator lock oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
When entering the elevator lock state, the elevator returns to this oor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-05 Service oors 1 0–65535 (oors 1–16) 65535 -
★
F6-06 Service oors 2 0–65535 (oors 17–32) 65535 -
★
F6-35 Service oors 3 0–65535 (oors 33–40) 65535 -
★
These parameters are used to set the service floors among floors 1–40. F6-05 (Service 
oors 1) corresponds to oors 1–16. F6-06 (Service oors 2) corresponds to oors 17–32. 
F6-35 (Service oors 3) corresponds to oors 33–40.
Set these parameters as follows:





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 160 -
Whether service oors of a parameter are allowed is indicated by a 16-bit binary number. 
The 16  bits  respectively correspond  to  16 floors from  low to high.  "1" indicates that  the 
elevator will respond to calls of this oor, and "0" indicates that the elevator will not respond 
to calls of this oor.
For example, the service oors of a 16-oor elevator are listed in the following table.
Table 7-5 Service oors of a 16-oor elevator
Bit Floor Whether Service Setting Bit Floor Whether Service Setting
Bit0 Floor 1 Allowed 1 Bit8 Floor 9 Forbidden 0
Bit1 Floor 2  Forbidden 0 Bit9 Floor 10 Allowed 1
Bit2 Floor 3 Allowed 1 Bit10 Floor 11 Allowed 1
Bit3 Floor 4 Allowed 1 Bit11 Floor 12 Forbidden 0
Bit4 Floor 5 Allowed 1 Bit12 Floor 13 Allowed 1
Bit5 Floor 6 Allowed 1 Bit13 Floor 14 Allowed 1
Bit6 Floor 7 Allowed 1 Bit14 Floor 15 Allowed 1
Bit7 Floor 8 Forbidden 0 Bit15 Floor 16 Allowed 1
The binary number indicated by the preceding table is 1111011001111101. The decimal 
equivalent of this binary number is 63101. Then set F6-05 to 63101.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-07
Number of elevators in 
group mode
1–8 1 -
★
F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8 1 -
★
These parameters are used to set the number of elevators and elevator No. in group/parallel 
mode.

Note

 
•
If F6-07 is set to 1, the setting of F6-08 becomes invalid.
 
•
Elevator No.1 is the master elevator in parallel mode and completes the most parallel logics.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-09 Elevator program control 0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to select the required elevator functions. Whether a function is enabled is indicated 
by a binary bit: "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function 
is disabled.
The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 161 -
Table 7-6 Functions indicated by bits of F6-09
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 Dispersed waiting
In single elevator or parallel mode, if this function 
is enabled, an idle elevator will not return to the 
base oor.
In group mode, this function is used together with 
the group control board to implement dispersed 
waiting.
0
Bit2
Parallel implemented 
at monitoring port
This function is enabled when the parallel mode 
is implemented at the RS232 serial port.
0
Bit3
Parallel implemented 
at CAN2
This function is enabled when parallel mode is 
implemented at CAN2.
0
Bit4
Parallel control in 
compatibility with 
NICE3000
This function is used when the NICE3000 is 
included in the group control system. The setting 
of this bit must be the same as that for all the 
other elevators in the group.
0
Bit6
Clear oor number 
and display direction 
in advance
The displayed oor number is cleared before the 
elevator reaches the target oor.
If the elevator needs to change the direction, the 
changed direction is displayed in advance.
0
Bit8 Single hall call button
It is applied to applications where there is only 
one hall call button.
0
Bit10
Err30 judgment at re-
leveling cancellation
It indicates Err30 judgment when re-leveling is 
cancelled.
0
Bit14
Time interval 
detection of safety 
circuit 2 and door lock 
circuit 2
If the states of safety circuits 1 and 2 or the states 
of door lock circuits 1 and 2 are inconsistent, 
the system will prohibit running. After the states 
restore normal, the system is powered on again 
and starts running.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-10 Leveling sensor lter time 10–50 14 ms
★
It indicates the delay time from the moment when the leveling sensor acts to the moment 
when the leveling signal becomes active. You need not modify it.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-11 Elevator function selection 0–65535 8448 -
★
It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" 
indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 162 -
Table 7-7 Functions indicated by bits of F6-09
Bit Function Description Default
Bit1
Disabling returning 
to base oor for 
verication
The function of returning to base oor for verication 
due to large deviation of the car position is disabled.
0
Bit2
Cancelling auto 
sequential arrange 
of hall call oor 
addresses to be 
displayed
If the display of a oor in group FE is set to 1, the 
following oors to be displayed are automatically 
arranged in the ascending order.
0
Bit5
Current detection 
valid at startup for 
synchronous motor
The controller performs output current detection when 
the synchronous motor is started up. If the current is 
abnormal, the output will be locked and the running will 
be forbidden.
0
Bit6
Reversing MCB 
lamp output
After this function is enabled, the MCB lamp output logic 
is reversed.
0
Bit7
Door open valid at 
non-door zone in 
the inspection state
In the inspection state, you can open/close the door by 
pressing the door open/close button at the non-door 
zone.
0
Bit8
Door open and 
close once after 
inspection turned to 
normal
The elevator door opens and closes once after the 
system turns from rst-time inspection to normal 
running.
1
Bit10
Buzzer not tweet 
upon re-leveling
The buzzer inside the car does not tweet upon re-
leveling.
0
Bit11
Super short oor 
function
The controller cannot perform shaft-tuning if the oor 
height is less than 500 mm. After this function is 
enabled, shaft-tuning can be performed normally.
0
Bit12 Fault auto reset
The controller automatically resets the faults once every 
hour.
0
Bit13
Err53 fault auto 
reset
When Err53 is reported, if the conditions of door open 
limit valid and door lock release are satised, the 
controller resets Err53 automatically. A maximum of 
three times of auto reset is allowed.
1
Bit14
Up slow-down not 
reset for super short 
oor
If this function is enabled, the up slow-down 1 signal 
does not reset oor display. The down slow-down 1 
signal still resets oor display. This is valid only when 
the customized super short oor function is enabled.
0
Bit15
Down slow-down 
not reset for super 
short oor
If this function is enabled, the down slow-down 1 signal 
does not reset oor display. The up slow-down 1 signal 
still resets oor display. This is valid only when the 
customized super short oor function is enabled.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-12 VIP oor 0 to F6-00 0 -
★
It is used to set the VIP oor. For details, see section 5.2.4.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 163 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-13 Security oor 0 to F6-00 0 -
★
It is used to set the security oor of the elevator. If the security signal is active or it is during 
the night security period, the elevator runs to  the security oor rst every time, stops and 
opens the door, and then runs to the target oor.
The elevator can be made to stop at the security oor in the following two ways:
 
•
Fd-07/Fd-08 is set to 5 (Security signal). If the security signal is active, the elevator 
enters the security state.
 
•
The night security floor function is enabled (FE-32 Bit5 = 2), the elevator enters the 
security state from 22:00 p.m. to 6:00 a.m.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-14
Start time of down 
collective selective 1
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-15
End time of down 
collective selective 1 
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-16
Start time of down 
collective selective 2 
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-17
End time of down 
collective selective 2
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
These four parameters define the time periods of down collective selective 1 and down 
collective selective 2, during which, the elevator responds to only downward hall calls.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-18
Start time of time-based 
oor service 1
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-19
End time of time-based 
oor service 1
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-20
Service oor 1 of time-
based oor service 1
0–65535 65535
-
☆
F6-21
Service oor 2 of time-
based oor service 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-36
Service oor 3 of time-
based oor service 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-22
Start time of time-based 
oor service 2
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-23
End time of time-based 
oor service 2
00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-24
Service oor 1 of time-
based oor service 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-25
Service oor 2 of time-
based oor service 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
F6-37
Service oor 3 of time-
based oor service 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 164 -
These parameters define the time periods of two groups of time-based services and 
corresponding service oors.
Service oor 1 corresponds to oors 1–16, service oor 2 corresponds to oors 17–32, and 
service oor 3 corresponds to oors 33–30.
In the time period of time-based service 1 (set by F6-18 and F6-19), the elevator responds to the 
service oors set by F6-20, F6-21 and F6-36 but ignores the service oors set by F6-05, F6-06 
and F5-35. The setting of time-based service oors is the same as that of service oors in F6-05.

Note

During the time-based oor service period, the settings of F6-05, F6-06 and F5-35 are invalid.
If the two periods of time-based oor service 1 and time-based oor service 2 are overlapped, the 
system implements time-based oor service 1 because it has higher priority level.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-26 Peak 1 start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-27 Peak 1 end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-28 Peak 1 oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
F6-29 Peak 2 start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-30 Peak 2 end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-31 Peak 2 oor F6-01 to F6-00 1 -
★
These parameters dene two peak time periods in parallel mode and corresponding oors. 
During a peak time period, if there are more than three  car calls  from the peak oor, the 
elevator enters the peak service state. At the moment, the car calls from the peak oor are 
valid all the time. The elevator returns to this oor if it is idle.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-38 Elevator lock start time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
F6-39 Elevator lock end time 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM
☆
These two parameters dene the elevator lock time period, during which automatic elevator 
lock has the same effect as elevator lock by means of the elevator lock switch.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-40 Program control selection 1 0–65535 0 -
★
F6-41 Program control selection 2 0–65535 0 -
★
F6-42 Program control selection 3 0–65535 0 -
★
These parameters are used to set program control functions. "1" indicates that the function 
is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 165 -
Table 7-8 Functions indicated by the bits of F6-40 to F6-42
F6-40 Program Control Selection 1
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 Disability function It is used to enable or disable the disability function. 0
Bit1 Soft limit function
When the up slow-down and down leveling signals are 
active and the up leveling signal is inactive, the system 
considers that the up limit is performed. It is the same 
for the down limit signal.
0
Bit2
JP16 input used as 
back door selection
This function is enabled if the opposite door function is 
used. When JP16 has input, the elevator opens only 
the back door. When IP16 has no input, the elevator 
opens only the front door.
0
Bit3
JP16 input used as 
the back door open 
signal
JP16 is used for the input of the back door open signal. 0
Bit4
Opening only one 
door of opposite 
doors under manual 
control
This function is enabled only in the opposite door 
control mode 2 (hall call independent, opposite-door 
manual control). In this case, only one door opens 
each time while the other door must stay in the door 
close limit state. 
In group Fd, the HCB-B extended input includes 
"Single/Double door selection". If this input is active, 
both doors open if there is a car call.
0
Bit5 Timed elevator lock F6-38/F6-39 is valid only when this function is enabled. 0
Bit6 Manual door This function is used for the elevator with manual door. 0
Bit7
Elevator lock/Fire 
emergency under 
hall call at any oor
When this function is enabled, the system enters the 
elevator lock or returning to re emergency oor state 
if the elevator lock input or re emergency input at any 
oor is active.
0
Bit8 Reserved - 0
Bit9
Disabling reverse 
oor number clear
The system clears all the current car calls every time 
the elevator changes the direction by default. When 
this function is enabled, the function of clearing reverse 
oor numbers is disabled.
0
Bit10
Displaying next 
arriving oor 
number
The next oor to be arrived at is displayed during 
elevator running. 
0
Bit11
Responding to car 
calls rst
The system responds to hall calls only after executing 
all car calls.
0
Bit12
Car call assisted 
command in single 
door used as 
disability function
You can set the auxiliary command terminal (CN8) 
on the CTB for input of the disability calls (folding 
command not required).
0





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 166 -
F6-40 Program Control Selection 1
Bit Function Description Default
Bit13
Folding command 
used as disability 
function and back 
door function
It is valid only when the function of Bit14 is enabled.
Bit13 = 1: Disability
Bit13 = 0: Back door
0
Bit14
Car call command 
folding
There are two folding methods when this function is 
enabled:
A. CN7 is used for front door calls or ordinary calls, 
and CN8 is used for back door calls or disability calls.
B. For CN7 and CN8, inputs 1 to 16 are used for front 
door calls or ordinary calls, and inputs 17 to 32 are 
used for back door calls or disability calls.
0
Bit15
JP20 used for 
switchover to back 
door
JP20 is used for input of switchover between the front 
door and the back door.
0
F6-41 Program Control Selection 2
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 Reserved - 0
Bit1 Reserved - 0
Bit2
Inspection to stop 
due to slow-down 1
During inspection running, if the slow-down 1 acts, the 
system decelerates to stop.
0
Bit3 Reserved - 0
Bit4
Buzzer tweet during 
door open delay
The buzzer will tweet when the door open delay time 
set in Fb-14 is reached.
0
Bit5 Reserved - 0
Bit6
Cancelling door 
open delay
Door open delay is cancelled when the door open 
delay button is pressed again.
0
Bit7 Reserved - 0
Bit8
Elevator lock at door 
open
In the elevator lock state, the elevator keeps the door 
open at the elevator lock oor.
0
Bit9
Display available at 
elevator lock
In the elevator lock state, hall calls are is displayed 
normally.
0
Bit10
Elevator lock in the 
attendant state
The elevator is locked properly in the attendant state. 0
Bit11 Blinking at arrival
The car display blinks when the elevator arrives at a 
oor. The blinking advance time is set in F6-47.
0
Bit12
Door re-open during 
door open delay
The door re-opens if the door open delay input is 
active during door close.
0
Bit13
Door re-open after 
car call of the 
present oor
The door re-opens if the car call of the present oor is 
valid during door close.
0





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 167 -
F6-42 Program Control Selection 3
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 Reserved - 0
Bit1
Cancelling door 
open/close 
command at delay 
after door open/
close limit
If this function is enabled, the door open/close 
command is cancelled at the delay of 1s after door 
open/close limit.
0
Bit2
Not judging door 
lock state at door 
close output
On normal conditions, the system determines that the 
door is completely closed only when the door close 
limit signal is active and the door lock is applied.
If this function is enabled, the system need not judge 
the door lock state.
0
Bit3
Door close 
command output 
during running
The door close command is output continuously during 
the elevator running.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-43 Attendant function selection 0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to select the attendant-related elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is 
enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-9 Attendant-related functions indicated by bits of F6-43
F6-43 Attendant Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0
Calls cancelled after 
entering attendant 
state
All car calls and hall calls are cancelled after the system 
enters the attendant state for the rst time.
0
Bit1
Not responding to 
hall calls
The car blinks inside, prompting there is hall call, but 
the system does not respond.
0
Bit2
Attendant/Automatic 
state switchover
If this function is enabled, the setting of F5-00 
(Attendant/Normal switchover time) is valid.
0
Bit3 Door close at jogging
The elevator door closes after the attendant presses the 
door close button manually.
0
Bit4 Automatic door close
It is the same as the normal state. After the door open 
holding time is reached, the door closes automatically.
0
Bit5
Buzzer tweet at 
intervals in attendant 
state
When the hall call oor and the car call oor are 
different, the buzzer tweets 2.5s at intervals.
0
Bit6
Continuous buzzer 
tweet in attendant 
state
When the hall call oor and the car call oor are 
different, the buzzer tweets continuously.
0





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 168 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-44
Fire emergency 
function selection
0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to select the re emergency functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, 
and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-10 Fire emergency functions indicated by bits of F6-44
F6-44 Fire Emergency Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 to 
Bit2
Reserved - 0
Bit3
Arrival gong output 
in inspection or re 
emergency state
The arrival gong is output in the inspection or re 
emergency state.
0
Bit4
Multiple car calls 
registered in re 
emergency state
Multiple car calls can be registered in the re 
emergency state. Otherwise, only one car call can be 
registered.
0
Bit5
Retentive at power 
failure in re 
emergency state
In the re emergency state, the current system and 
car state will be memorized at power failure and be 
resumed after the system is powered on again.
0
Bit6
Closing door by 
holding down the door 
close button
In the re emergency state, the door close process 
can be completed only by holding down the door close 
button until the door close limit is reached. Otherwise, 
it will be switched over to door open automatically.
0
Bit7
Door close at low 
speed
To implement door close at low speed in re 
emergency state, wiring to the CTB for output of door 
close at low speed needs to be added.
0
Bit8
Door close at car call 
registering
The elevator enters the door close process 
automatically if a car call is registered.
0
Bit9
Displaying hall calls in 
re emergency state
Hall calls are displayed in the re emergency state. 0
Bit10 Reserved - 0
Bit11
Exiting re emergency 
state for reghter
The system can exit the re emergency state only 
after the elevator arrives at the re emergency oor.
0
Bit12 Reserved - 0
Bit13 Reserved - 0
Bit14
Opening door by 
holding down the door 
open button
In the re emergency state, the door open process 
can be completed only by holding down the door open 
button until the door open limit is reached. Otherwise, 
it will be switched over to door close automatically.
0
Bit15
Automatic door open 
in re emergency oor
The door opens automatically after the elevator arrives 
at the re emergency oor.
0





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 169 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-45
Emergency evacuation 
function selection
0–65535 0 -
★
It is  used  to  select  the  emergency  evacuation-related  functions.  "1"  indicates  that  the 
function is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-11 Emergency evacuation functions indicated by bits of F6-45
F6-45 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0
Direction 
determine mode
0
Automatically 
calculating 
direction
1
Load direction 
determining (based 
on load cell data or 
half-load signal)
1
Direction 
of nearest 
landing 
oor 
0
Bit1 0 0 0 0
Bit2
Stopping at 
evacuation 
parking oor
During evacuation running, the elevator arrives at the 
evacuation parking oor set in F6-49 (it must be a non-zero 
value and is a service oor). Otherwise, the elevator stops 
at the nearest oor.
0
Bit3
Door open at 
single leveling 
signal
During evacuation running, when the elevator arrives at 
the target oor and a leveling signal is active, the elevator 
decelerates to stop.
0
Bit4
Compensation at 
startup
The non-load-cell startup is still valid in the process of 
evacuation running.
0
Bit5 to 
Bit7
Reserved - 0
Bit8
Emergency 
running time 
protection
If the elevator does not arrive at the required oor after 
50s emergency evacuation running time, Err33 is reported. 
In this case, the function of switching over shorting stator 
braking mode to controller drive based on the time setting 
cannot be implemented.
0
Bit9 Reserved - 0
Bit10
Emergency 
buzzer output
The buzzer tweets at intervals in the emergency evacuation 
running state.
0
Bit11 Reserved - 0
Bit12
Shorting stator 
braking mode 
switched over to 
controller drive
It enables the function of switching over shorting stator 
braking mode to controller drive.
0





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 170 -
F6-45 Emergency Evacuation Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit13
Mode of shorting 
stator braking 
mode switched 
over to controller 
drive
0
Time setting
If the time of the shorting stator braking mode exceeds 
50s, the controller starts to drive the elevator.
0
1
Speed setting
If the speed is still smaller than the value of F6-48 
after 10s in the shorting stator braking mode, the 
controller starts to drive the elevator.
Bit14
Emergency 
evacuation exit 
mode
0
The system exits emergency evacuation when 
receiving the door open limit signal from the elevator 
that arrives at the target oor.
0
1
The system exits emergency evacuation when 
receiving the door close limit signal from the elevator 
that arrives at the target oor.
Bit15
Function 
selection of 
shorting stator 
braking mode
It enables the function. When this function is enabled, the 
setting of related function codes becomes effective.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-46 VIP function selection 0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to select the elevator VIP function. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and 
"0" indicates that the function is disabled.
The functions dened by the binary bits are described in the following table.
Table 7-12 VIP functions indicated by bits of F6-46
F6-46 VIP Function Selection
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0
VIP enabled by hall 
call (at VIP oor)
After this function is enabled, the system enters VIP 
running.
0
Bit1
VIP enabled by 
terminal
After the terminal for VIP hall call becomes ON, the 
system enters VIP running.
0
Bit2-Bit7 Reserved - 0
Bit8
Number of VIP car 
calls limited
If this function is enabled, only one car call can be 
selected simultaneously in the VIP state.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-47 Blinking advance time 0.0–15.0 0 s
☆
It is used to set the blinking advance time when the elevator arrives the oor required by the 
car call.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 171 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-48
Emergency evacuation 
switching speed
0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s
★
It is used to set the switching speed at shorting stator braking mode switched over to 
controller drive via speed setting.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F6-49 Evacuation parking oor 0 to F6-01 0 s
★
It is used to set the evacuation parking oor when Bit2 (Stopping at evacuation parking oor) 
in F6-45 is enabled.
Group F7: Test Function Parameters
This group of parameters is specialized for elevator commissioning.
Follow the instructions for normal-speed commissioning:
1.  Before the commissioning, ensure that the shaft is unobstructed and the related 
parameters have been set properly.
2.  Run the elevator to the middle oor of the shaft at the inspection speed so as to prevent 
wrong running direction.
3.  Perform single-oor  command commissioning  and then  perform multi-oor command 
commissioning.
4.  After the commissioning is complete, check that the parameters in this group are set 
properly.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-00 Car call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 -
☆
F7-01 Up call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 -
☆
F7-02
Down call oor registered 0 to F6-00 0 -
☆
These parameters are used to set the destination floors at elevator commissioning or 
repairing. They can be respectively used as the car call button, hall call up button and hall 
call down button. They remain valid after the commissioning command is input, and become 
invalid until they are set to 0 or the system suffers power failure.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-03 Random running times 0–60000 0 -
☆
It is used to set the random running times of the system.
The NICE3000
new
 has the random automatic running function. If the setting of F7-03 is 
greater than 60000, the system keeps implementing random automatic running until you set 
F7-03 to 0.
You can set the time interval between two times of random running in F7-08.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 172 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-04 Hall call enabled
0: Yes
1: No
0 -
☆
It is used to enable the hall call function.
 
•
0: Yes (hall call allowed)
 
•
1: No (hall call forbidden)
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-05 Door open enabled
0: Yes
1: No
0 -
☆
It is used to enable the door open function.
 
•
0: Yes (door open allowed)
 
•
1: No (door open forbidden)

Note

Continuous running of the elevator without opening the door accelerates overheating of the 
controller module. Long-time use in such mode may cause overheat protection, and therefore, use 
the function with caution.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-06 Overload function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 -
☆
It is used to enable the overload function.

Note

This function is used only in the heavy-load test. Once the test is complete, prohibit over-load 
running immediately.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-07 Limit switch
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0 -
☆
It is used to enable the limit switch function.

Note

The limit switch is disabled only in the test of the nal limit switch. Use the function with caution.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F7-08 Time interval of random running 0–1000 0 s
☆
It is used to set the time interval between two times of random running.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 173 -
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-00 Load for load cell auto-tuning 0–100 0 %
★
It is used to set the load for load cell auto-tuning.
To perform load cell auto-tuning, do as follows:
1.  Ensure that F8-01 is set to 0 and F5-36 is set to 2 or 3 to make the system allow load 
cell auto tuning.
2.  Stop the elevator at any oor, with the car in the no-load state. Set F8-00 to 0 and press 
the ENTER key.
3.  Put N% load in the car. Then set F8-00 to N and press the ENTER key.
For example, if you put 500 kg load in the elevator with rated load of 1000 kg, set F8-00 
to 50.
After the load-cell auto-tuning is completed, the corresponding no-load and full-load data 
will be recorded in F8-06 and F8-07. You can also manually input the data according to the 
actual situation.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-01 Pre-torque selection 0–2 0 -
★
It is used to set the pre-torque compensation mode at startup of the elevator.
The values are as follows:
 
•
0: Pre-torque invalid
Load cell auto-tuning is allowed.
 
•
1: Load cell pre-torque compensation
With a load cell, the system implements the pre-torque compensation function.
 
•
2: Automatic pre-torque compensation
The system automatically adjusts the compensated torque at startup without a load cell.
If F8-01 is set to 1, the system outputs the torque matching the load in advance to ensure 
the riding comfort at startup. The output torque is limited by F2-08 (Torque upper limit). 
When the load torque is greater than the set torque upper limit, the output torque of the 
system is the torque upper limit.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 %
★
It is used to set the pre-torque offset. It is actually the balance coefcient of the elevator, 
indicating the percentage of the car load to the rated load when the counterweight and the 
car weight are balanced.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 174 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Unit Property
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 -
★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 -
★
These two parameters are used to set the pre-torque gain when the elevator runs on the 
drive side or the brake side.
For details, see section 5.1.5.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-05 Current car load 0–1023 0 - ●
This parameter is readable and reects the load situation in the car. The value is sampled by 
the NICE3000
new 
by using a load cell. This parameter is used to judge overload or full-load, 
or calculate the torque current for load cell pre-torque compensation.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-06 Car no-load load 0–1023 0 -
★
F8-07 Car full-load load 0–1023 100 -
★
These two parameters respectively specify the car no-load load and full-load load. They are AD 
sampling values.

Note

If F8-06 = F8-07, the full-load and over-load become invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-08 Anti-nuisance function 0, 1, 2, 4 0 -
☆
It is the criteria for judging whether nuisance exists.
The values are as follows:
 
•
0: Anti-nuisance function disabled
 
•
1: Nuisance judged by load cell
A load cell is required. The system judges whether nuisance exists by comparing the 
load cell data and the number of car calls.
 
•
2: Nuisance judged by light curtain
The system determines that nuisance exists when the light curtain does not act after the 
elevator stops at arrival for three consecutive times.
 
•
4: Nuisance judged by light-load signal
If the light-load signal is active, the system determines that nuisance exists when the 
number of car calls is greater than a certain value.
When the system determines that the elevator is in the nuisance state, it cancels all car 
calls. In this case, call calls need to be registered again.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 175 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-09
Emergency evacuation 
operation speed at power failure
0.000–0.100 0.050 m/s
★
It is used to set the speed for emergency evacuation operation at power failure.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-10
Emergency evacuation 
operation mode at power failure
0–2 0 -
★
It is used to set the emergency evacuation operation mode at power failure.
 
•
0: Motor not running
 
•
1: UPS
 
•
2: 48 V battery power supply
For details, see section 5.2.1.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-11 Brake apply delay 0.000–1.000 0.600 s
★
It is used to set the time from the moment when the system sends the brake apply command 
to the moment when the brake is completely applied. For details, see Figure 7-3.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-12 Fire emergency oor 2 0 to F6-00 0 -
★
It is used  to set the second re emergency oor. The  switchover between re  emergency 
oor 1 and re emergency oor 2 is implemented by means of input from the MCB. When 
this signal is input, the elevator enters the re emergency state and returns to this oor.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-16
Start address of hall call 
auxiliary command
0–40 0 -
☆
It is used to set the start address of hall calls from the back door.
Address of a hall call from the back door = Address of a hall call from the front door at the 
same oor + F8-16
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F8-17 Hall call address check 0–1 0 -
☆
If it is valid, the HCB no longer displays the current oor information of the car but displays 
the set address of itself, convenient for inspection in the case of wrong oor address setting.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 176 -
Group F9: Time Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-00
Idle time before 
returning to base oor
0–240 10 min
☆
It is used to set the idle time of the elevator before returning to the base oor.
When the idle time of the elevator exceeds the setting of this parameter, the elevator returns 
to the base oor.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-01
Time for fan and lamp 
to be turned off
0–240 2 min ☆
It is used to set the time that fan and lamp stays ON before being turned off automatically.
If there is no running command in the automatic running state, the system turns off the fan 
and lamp automatically after the time set in this parameter.
If this parameter is set to 0, it becomes invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-02 Motor running time limit 0–45 45 s
★
It is used to set the running time limit of the motor.
In normal running state, if the continuous motor running time in the same direction between 
two adjacent oors exceeds the setting of this parameter but no leveling signal is received, 
the system will perform protection.
This parameter is mainly used for over-time protection in the case of steel rope slipping on 
the traction sheave.
If this parameter is set to a value smaller than 3s, it becomes invalid.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-03 Clock: year 2000–2100 Current year YYYY
☆
F9-04 Clock: month 1–12 Current month MM
☆
F9-05 Clock: day 1–31 Current day DD
☆
F9-06 Clock: hour 0–23 Current hour HH
☆
F9-07 Clock: minute 0–59 Current minute MM
☆
These parameters are used to set the current date and time of the system.
Timekeeping is supported at power failure. You need to set the current system time correctly 
so that functions related to the time can be implemented.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 177 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
F9-09 Accumulative running time 0–65535 0 h
●
F9-11 High byte of running times 0–9999 0 -
●
F9-12 Low byte or running times 0–9999 0 -
●
These parameters are used to view the actual accumulative running time and running times 
of the elevator.
Running times of the elevator = F9-11 x 10000 + F9-12.
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-00 Keypad display selection 0–3 3 -
☆
The NICE3000
new
 system has three buttons and three 7-segment LEDs on the MCB. You 
can change the display content through the setting of this parameter.
 
•
0: Reversed display of physical oor
 
•
1: Positive display of physical oor
 
•
2: Reversed display of hall call oor
 
•
3: Positive display of hall call oor
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-01 Display in running state 1–65535 65535 -
☆
It is used to set the running parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the 
running state.
A total of 16 running parameters can be displayed during running, each respectively 
corresponding to the 16 binary bits of FA-01. "1" indicates that the parameter is displayed, 
while "0" indicates that the parameter is not displayed. You can switch over the displayed 
parameter by pressing the shift button and set whether to display this parameter according 
to your own using habit. 
The 16 binary bits correspond to the running parameters listed in the following table.
Table 7-13 Running parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-01
Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default
Bit0 Running speed 1 Bit8 Output terminal 1
Bit1 Set speed 1 Bit9 Current oor 1
Bit2 Bus voltage 1 Bit10 Current position 1
Bit3 Output voltage 1 Bit11 Car load 1
Bit4 Output current 1 Bit12 CTB input state 1
Bit5 Output frequency  1 Bit13 CTB output state 1
Bit6 Input terminal low bits 1 Bit14 System state 1
Bit7 Input terminal high bits
1
Bit15 Pre-toque current
1





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 178 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-02 Display in stop state 1–65535 65535 -
☆
It is used to set the parameters displayed on the keypad when the elevator is in the stop 
state.
A total of 16 parameters can be displayed at stop. The use is the same as that of FA-01.
The 16 binary bits correspond to the stop parameters listed in the following table.
Table 7-14 Stop parameters corresponding to 16 bits of FA-02
Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default
Bit0 Running speed
1
Bit8
Slow-down distance at 
rated speed
1
Bit1 Bus voltage 1 Bit9 CTB input state 1
Bit2 Input terminal low bits 1 Bit10 CTB output state 1
Bit3 Input terminal high bits 1 Bit11 System state 1
Bit4 Output terminal 1 Bit12 Reserved 0
Bit5 Current oor 1 Bit13 Reserved 0
Bit6 Current position 1 Bit14 Reserved 0
Bit7 Car load 1 Bit15 Reserved 0
The running and stop parameters of the NICE3000
new
 system are the important references 
for engineers to perform commissioning on site. The parameters are described as follows:
1)  Running speed: indicates the actual running speed of the elevator.
Its maximum value is F0-03 (Maximum running speed), in unit of m/s.
2)  Set speed: indicates the set speed of the NICE3000
new
 system during elevator running. 
It is the running speed calculated by the system theoretically at which the elevator 
should run. Its unit is m/s.
3)  Bus voltage: indicates the DC bus voltage of the NICE3000
new
 system, in unit of m/s.
4)  Output voltage: indicates the effective value of the equivalent voltage of the PWM wave 
output by the NICE3000
new
 system, in unit of V.
5)  Output current: indicates the effective value of the actual current when the NICE3000
new
 
system drives the motor to turn, in unit of A.
6)  Output frequency: indicates the actual frequency of the motor during running. It has a 
xed corresponding relationship with the running speed. The unit is Hz.
7)  Input terminal low bits: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that 
the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are dened as below:





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 179 -
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
BIT0 Reserved BIT8 Inspection signal
BIT1 Up leveling signal BIT9 Inspection up signal
BIT2 Down leveling signal BIT10 Inspection down signal
BIT3 Door zone signal BIT11 Fire emergency signal
BIT4 Safety circuit feedback 1 BIT12 Up limit signal
BIT5 Door lock circuit feedback 1 BIT13 Down limit signal
BIT6 RUN contactor feedback BIT14 Overload signal
BIT7 Brake contactor feedback 1 BIT15 Full-load signal
8)  Input terminal high bits: indicate the meaning of input terminals by bit. "1" indicates that 
the signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are dened as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
BIT0 Up slow-down 1 signal BIT8 Door machine 1 light curtain
BIT1 Down slow-down 1 signal BIT9 Door machine 2 light curtain
BIT2 Up slow-down 2 signal BIT10 Brake output feedback 2
BIT3 Down slow-down 2 signal BIT11 UPS input
BIT4 Up slow-down 3 signal BIT12 Elevator lock input
BIT5 Down slow-down 3 signal BIT13 Safety circuit feedback 2
BIT6
Shorting door lock circuit 
contactor output feedback
BIT14
Synchronous motor self-locked 
feedback
BIT7 Motor overheat signal BIT15 Door lock circuit feedback 2
9)  Output terminal: indicates the meaning of output terminals by bit. "1" indicates that the 
signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are dened as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
BIT0 Reserved BIT8 Door machine 2 close
BIT1 RUN contactor output BIT9 Contactor healthy
BIT2 Brake contactor output BIT10 Fault state
BIT3
Shorting door lock circuit contactor 
output
BIT11 System in running state
BIT4 Fire emergency oor arrival signal BIT12 Reserved
BIT5 Door machine 1 open BIT13 Reserved
BIT6 Door machine 1 close BIT14 Reserved
BIT7 Door machine 2 open BIT15 Emergency leveling buzzer output





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 180 -
10)  Current floor: indicates the information of the physical floor where the elevator is 
located. It is the same as the value of F4-01.
11)  Current position: indicates the absolute distance from the current elevator car to the 
leveling ag of the rst oor, in unit of m.
12)  Car load: indicates the percentage of the car load to the rated load judged by the 
NICE3000
new
 system based on data from the sensor, in unit of %.
13)  CTB input state: indicates the meaning of CTB inputs by bit. "1" indicates that the signal 
is active.
A total of 16 bits are dened as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
BIT0 Light curtain 1 BIT8 Door open button
BIT1 Light curtain 2 BIT9 Door close button
BIT2 Door open limit 1 BIT10 Door open delay button
BIT3 Door open limit 2 BIT11 Direct travel ride signal
BIT4 Door close limit 1 BIT12 Attendant signal
BIT5 Door close limit 2 BIT13 Direction change signal
BIT6 Full-load signal BIT14 Independent running signal
BIT7 Overload signal BIT15 Fireghter operation signal
14)  CTB output state: indicates the meaning of CTB outputs by bit. "1" indicates that the 
signal is active.
A total of 16 bits are dened as below:
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
BIT0 Door open output 1 BIT8 Door open button display
BIT1 Door close output 1 BIT9 Door close button display
BIT2 Door lock signal BIT10
Door open delay button display
BIT3 Door open output 2 BIT11 Non-door zone stop
BIT4 Door close output 2 BIT12 Reserved
BIT5 Door lock signal BIT13 Buzzer output
BIT6 Up arrival gong signal BIT14 Reserved
BIT7 Down arrival gong signal BIT15 Energy saving signal
15)  System state: indicates the system state by bit. "1" indicates that the signal is active. 
A total of 16 bits are dened as below:





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 181 -
Bit Meaning Bit Meaning
BIT0 Light curtain state 1 BIT8 Car state:
1: Door open
2: Door open holding
3: Door close
4: Door close limit
5: Running
BIT1 Light curtain state 2 BIT9
BIT2 Hall elevator lock (indicated on HCB) BIT10
BIT3 Hall re emergency (indicated on HCB) BIT11
BIT4 Elevator state:
0: Inspection
1: Shaft auto-tuning
3: Return to base oor at re 
emergency
4: Fireghter operation
6: Attendant operation
7: Automatic (normal)
BIT12 Full-load
BIT5 BIT13 Overload
BIT6 BIT14 Reserved
BIT7 BIT15 Reserved
16)  Pre-torque current: indicates the percentage of the pre-torque current compensated by 
the NICE3000
new
 system at startup to the rated current, in unit of %.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0 Degree (°)
●
It displays the real-time encoder angle. This parameter cannot be modied.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-05 Control board software 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-06 Drive board software 0–65535 0 -
●
These two parameters respectively display the program version number of the logic control 
board and the drive control board.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C
●
It displays the current temperature of the heatsink.
Normally, the heatsink temperature is below 40°C. When the heatsink temperature is too 
high, the system lowers the carrier frequency automatically to reduce heat dissipation. When 
the heatsink temperature rises to a certain value, the system reports the module overheat 
fault and stops running.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 %
●
It displays the percentage of pre-torque current to the rated current (positive/negative 
display, indicating driving or braking).





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 182 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-12 Logic information 0–65535 0 -
●
It displays the elevator status parameters.
The LEDs are arranged as 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 from left to right. LED 1 shows the state of door 1. 
LEDs 2 and 3 have no display. LEDs 4 and 5 together show the elevator state.
Figure 7-7 Elevator state display

12345

The LEDs are dened in the following table.
Table 7-15 LED display of the elevator state
LED 5
LED 4
LED 3 LED 2 LED 1
Elevator State
No 
Display
No 
Display
Door 1 State
00 Inspection state 8 Elevator lock
- -
0 Waiting state
01 Shaft auto-tuning 09
Idle elevator 
parking
1 Door open state
02 Micro-leveling 10
Re-leveling at 
inspection speed
2 Door open limit
03
Returning to 
base oor at re 
emergency
11
Emergency 
evacuation 
operation
3 Door close state
04
Fireghter 
operation
12 Motor auto-tuning 4 Door close limit
05 Fault state 13 Keypad control - -
06
Attendant 
operation
14 Base oor check - -
07 Automatic running 15 VIP state - -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 -
●
It displays the system running curve information. LEDs 5, 4 and 3 have no display, while 
LEDs 2 and 1 show the running curve information.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 183 -
LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1
No 
Display
No 
Display
No 
Display
Curve Information
- - -
00 Standby state 09 Deceleration start segment
01
Zero-speed start 
segment
10
Linear deceleration 
segment
02
Zero-speed holding 
segment
11 Deceleration end segment
03 Reserved 12 Zero speed at stop
04 Startup speed stage 13 Current stop phase
05
Acceleration start 
segment
14 Reserved
06
Linear acceleration 
segment
15 Stop data processing
07
Acceleration end 
segment
16-20 Auto-tuning stage
08
Stable-speed running 
segment
21 Emergency operation
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-14 Set speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V
●
FA-17 Present position 0.00–300.0 0 m
●
FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A
●
FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz
●
FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A
●
FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V
●
FA-22 Output torque 0–100 0 %
●
FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW
●
These parameters display the current performance state parameters of the system (the 
output torque and output power supports positive/negative display).
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-24 Communication interference 0–65535 0 -
●
It displays the current communication quality of the system, as described in the following 
table.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 184 -
Table 7-16 Communication quality display
LED 5 LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1
SPI 
Communication 
Quality
No 
Display
CAN2 
Communication 
Quality
Modbus 
Communication 
Quality
CAN1 
Communication 
Quality
0 Good
-
0 Good 0 Good 0 Good
· · · · · · · ·
· · · · · · · ·
9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted
0–9 indicates the communication quality. The greater the number is, the larger interference 
the communication suffers and the poorer the communication quality is.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-33 Car input state 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-34 Car output state 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-35 Hall sate 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-36 System state 1 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-37 System state 2 0–65535 0 -
●
The following gure shows an example of the displayed input states.
Figure 7-8 Example of input state display

12345
A
B
C
E
F
G
DP
Each segment indicates a 
function code.
DP
A
B
C
E
F
G
DD
Function code
State

As shown in the preceding gure, the LEDs from right to left are numbered 1, 2, 3, 4, and 
5. For FA-26 to FA-37, LEDs 5 and 4 shows the function No.; LED 3 shows whether the 
function is valid (1) or invalid (0); the 16 segments of LEDs 1 and 2 show the states of the 
16 functions in this parameter. According to the gure, LEDs 5, 4, and 3 show that function 
10 (Inspection down) is 1 (Valid); LEDs 1 and 2 show that besides function 10, functions 
4 (Safety circuit feedback), 5 (Door lock circuit feedback), 6 (RUN contactor feedback), 7 
(Brake contactor feedback), and 8 (Inspection signal) are valid.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 185 -
FA-26 Input state 1 FA-28 Input state 3
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Reserved 8 Inspection signal 64 Reserved 72
Fire 
emergency 
oor 
switchover
1 Up leveling signal 9 Inspection up 65
Door 1 safety 
edge signal
73 Reserved
2
Down leveling 
signal
10 Inspection down 66
Door 2 safety 
edge signal
74 Reserved
3 Door zone signal 11
Fire emergency 
signal
67
Motor overheat 
signal
75 Reserved
4
Safety circuit 
feedback
12 Up limit signal 68
Earthquake 
signal
76 Reserved
5
Door lock circuit 
feedback
13 Down limit signal 69
Back door 
forbidden
77 Reserved
6
RUN contactor 
feedback
14 Overload signal 70 Light-load 78 Reserved
7
Brake contactor 
feedback
15 Full-load signal 71 Half-load 79 Reserved
FA-27 Input state 2 FA-30 Input state 5
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
16
Up slow-down 1 
signal
24
Door machine 1 
light curtain
0 Reserved 8 Reserved
17
Down slow-down 1 
signal
25
Door machine 2 
light curtain
1 Reserved 9 Reserved
18
Up slow-down 2 
signal
26
Brake contactor 
feedback 2
2 Reserved 10 Reserved
19
Down slow-down 2 
signal
27 UPS input 3 Reserved 11 Reserved
20
Up slow-down 3 
signal
28
Elevator lock 
input
4
High-voltage 
safety circuit 
signal
12 Reserved
21
Down slow-down 3 
signal
29
Safety circuit 2 
signal
5
High-voltage 
door lock 
circuit signal
13 Reserved
22
Shorting door lock 
circuit contactor 
feedback
30
Shorting motor 
stator contactor 
feedback
6 Reserved 14 Reserved
23
Fireghter running 
signal
31
Door lock circuit 
2 feedback
7 Reserved 15 Reserved





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 186 -
FA-31 Output state 1 FA-32 Output state 2
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Reserved 8 Door 2 close 16
High-voltage 
startup of 
brake
24 Reserved
1
RUN contactor 
output
9
Brake and RUN 
contactors 
healthy
17
Elevator 
running in up 
direction
25 Reserved
2
Brake contactor 
output
10
Fault state 
above level 3 
18
Lamp/Fan 
output
26 Reserved
3
Shorting door lock 
circuit contactor 
output
11 Running state 19
Medical 
sterilization
27 Reserved
4
Fire emergency 
oor arrival
12
Shorting motor 
stator contactor 
output 
20
Non-door zone 
stop
28 Reserved
5 Door 1 open 13
Power failure 
emergency 
output
21
Electric lock 
output
29 Reserved
6 Door 1 close 14 System healthy 22
Non-service 
state
30 Reserved
7 Door 2 open 15
Emergency 
leveling tweet
23 Reserved 31 Reserved
FA-33 Car input state FA-34 Car output state
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Reserved 8 Overload input 0 Reserved 8
Down arrival 
gong
1 Door 1 light curtain 9
Light-load 
input
1 Door 1 open 9 Reserved
2 Door 2 light curtain 10 Reserved 2 Door 1 close 10 Reserved
3 Door 1 open limit 11 Reserved 3
Forced door 
close 1
11 Reserved
4 Door 2 open limit 12 Reserved 4 Door 2 open 12 Reserved
5 Door 1 close limit 13 Reserved 5 Door 2 close 13 Reserved
6 Door 2 close limit 14 Reserved 6
Forced door 
close 2
14 Reserved
7 Full-load input 15 Reserved 7 Up arrival gong 15 Reserved





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 187 -
FA-35 Hall state
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Reserved 4 VIP signal 8 Reserved 12 Reserved
1 Elevator lock signal 5 Reserved 9 Reserved 13 Reserved
2
Fire emergency 
signal
6
Door close 
button input
10 Reserved 14 Reserved
3
Current oor 
forbidden
7 Reserved 11 Reserved 15 Reserved
FA-36 System state 1 FA-37 System state 2
No. Function No. Function No. Function No. Function
0 Door open 1 button 8
Door open 2 
button
0
Up direction 
display
8 Reserved
1 Door close 1 button 9
Door close 2 
button
1
Down direction 
display
9 Reserved
2 Door open delay 1 10 Door open 2 2 Running state 10 Reserved
3
Direct travel ride 
switch
11 Reserved 3
System full-
load
11 Reserved
4 Attendant switch 12 Reserved 4
System 
overload
12 Reserved
5
Direction change 
switch
13 Reserved 5
System half-
load
13 Reserved
6
Independent 
running switch
14 Reserved 6
System light-
load
14 Reserved
7
Fire emergency 2 
switch
15 Reserved 7 Reserved 15 Reserved
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FA-46 Hall call communication state 1 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-47 Hall call communication state 2 0–65535 0 -
●
FA-48 Hall call communication state 3 0–65535
0 -
●
These parameters display the communication state between HCBs of all floors and the 
MCB.
FA-46, FA-47, and FA-48 respectively  indicate the communication state of oors 1 to 16, 
17 to 32, and 33 to 40. As shown in Figure 7-4, LEDs 5 and 4 show the oor address; LED 
3 show  whether  the communication for  this floor address  is normal ("1" is  displayed) or 
interrupted ("0" is displayed). The communication quality can be viewed from LEDs 1 and 
2: The 16 segments show the communication state of 16 oor addresses; ON indicates that 
the communication is normal, and OFF indicates that the communication is interrupted.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 188 -
Group Fb: Door Function Parameter
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-00 Number of door machine (s) 1–2 1 -
★
It is used to set the number of door machine(s).
Set this parameter based on actual conditions.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-01 CTB software 00–999 0 -
●
It displays the software of the CTB connected to the controller.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-02
Service oors 1 of door 
machine 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-03
Service oors 2 of door 
machine 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-18
Service oors 3 of door 
machine 1
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-04
Service oors 1 of door 
machine 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-05
Service oors 2 of door 
machine 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
Fb-19
Service oors 3 of door 
machine 2
0–65535 65535 -
☆
These parameters are used to set the service oors of door machine 1 and door machine 2.
Service floors 1 correspond to floors 1–16; service floors 2 correspond to floors 17–32; 
service oors 3 correspond to oors 33–48. The setting method is the same as that for F6-
05.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-06 Door open protection time 5–99 10 s
☆
It is used to set the door open protection time.
After outputting the door open command, if the system does not receive the door open limit 
signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-opens the door. When the door 
open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err48.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-07 Arrival gong output delay 0–1000 0 ms
☆
When the value of this parameter is larger than 10 and the car display is switched over to 
the destination oor, the system outputs the arrival gong after the time set in this parameter. 
If the value is smaller than 10, the system outputs the arrival gong at stop.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 189 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-08 Door close protection time 5–99 15 s
☆
It is used to set the door close protection time.
After outputting the door close command, if the system does not receive the door close limit 
signal after the time set in this parameter, the system re-closes the door. When the door 
open/close times reach the value set in Fb-09, the system reports fault Err49.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-09 Door re-open times 0–20 0 -
☆
It is used to set the door re-open/re-close times allowed when door open/close is abnormal.

Note

If this parameter is set to 0, it indicates that door re-open is not supported; in this case, the 
elevator keeps opening/closing the door if it does not receive the door open/close limit signal.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-10 Door state of standby elevator 0–2 0 -
☆
It is used to set the door state when the elevator is in stop and standby state.
The values are as follows:
 
•
0: Closing the door as normal at base oor
 
•
1: Waiting with door open at base oor
 
•
2: Waiting with door open at each oor
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-11
Door open holding 
time for hall call
1–1000 5 s
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a hall call. The elevator closes the 
door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-12
Door open holding 
time for car call
1–1000 3 s
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a car call. The elevator closes the 
door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-13
Door open holding 
time at base oor
1–1000 10 s
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time after the elevator arrives at the base oor. The 
elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 190 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-14 Door open delay 10–1000 30 s
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is door open delay input. The 
elevator closes the door immediately after receiving a door close command.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-15 Special door open holding time 10–1000 30 s
☆
It is used to set the door open holding time when there is a disability call.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-16 Manual door open holding time 1–60 5 s
☆
It is used to set the door open limit delay in the case of manual door. This parameter is valid 
when the manual door function is used.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fb-17
Holding time for 
forced door close
5–180 120 s
☆
It is used to set the holding time before forced door close is implemented.
If the forced door close function is enabled, the system enters the forced door close state 
and sends a forced door close signal when there is no door close signal after the time set in 
this parameter is reached.
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-00
Program control for 
protection function
0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function 
is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
FC-00 Program control for protection function
Bit  Function Description Default
Bit0
Short-circuit to 
ground detection at 
power-on
Whether the motor is short-circuited to ground is 
detected at power-on. If the motor is short-circuited to 
ground, the controller blocks the output immediately, 
and reports the fault.
0
Bit1 Reserved - 0
Bit2
Decelerating to 
stop at valid light 
curtain
During normal-speed running, the elevator decelerates 
to stop immediately after the light curtain acts, and 
then runs to the registered destination oor after the 
light curtain restores. This function is mainly used in 
the case of manual door.
0





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 191 -
FC-00 Program control for protection function
Bit  Function Description Default
Bit9
Mode without door 
open/close limit
In this mode, the door open/close limit signal is not 
required, and the system automatically judges door 
open/close limit. The system determines that door 
open limit is implemented 3s after the door open 
command is output and door close limit is implemented 
3s after the door close command is output.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-01
Program control 2 for 
protection function
0–65535 0 -
★
It is used to set program control related to protection functions. "1" indicates that the function 
is enabled, and "0" indicates that the function is disabled.
FC-01 Program control 2 for protection function
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 Overload protection It sets whether to implement overload protection. 1
Bit1
Canceling protection 
at output phase loss
It sets whether to implement protection at output phase 
loss.
0
Bit4
Light curtain 
judgment at door 
close limit
At door close limit, the door re-opens if the light curtain 
is valid.
0
Bit5
Canceling SPI 
communication 
judgment
It sets whether to implement wire-breaking detection 
on SPI communication between the MCB and the drive 
board.
0
Bit6
Canceling MCB 
overspeed judgment
It sets whether to implement MCB overspeed judgment . 0
Bit8 Reserved - 0
Bit14
Canceling protection 
at input phase loss
It sets whether to implement protection at input phase 
loss.
0
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-02 Overload protection coefcient 0.50–10.00 1.00 -
★
After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-02 x Rated motor current) and the 
duration lasts the time specied in the inverse time lag curve, the system outputs fault Err11 
indicating motor overload.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-03 Overload pre-warning coefcient 50–100 80 %
★
After detecting that the output current exceeds (FC-03 x Rated motor current) and the 
duration lasts  the time  specied in  the inverse  time lag curve, the system outputs a pre-
warning signal.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 192 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-04 Opposite door selection 0–3 0 -
★
It is used to set opposite door-related control function.
The values are as follows:
 
•
0: Simultaneous control
 
•
1: Hall call independent, car call simultaneous
 
•
2: Hall call independent, car call manual control
 
•
3: Hall call independent, car call independent
For details on the use of the opposite door, see section 5.2.3.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-06 Designated fault 0–99 0 -
☆
It is used to designate the fault to be monitored.
The designated fault code is saved in parameters of FC-07 to FC-19, and will not be 
overwritten.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-07 Designated fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-08 Designated fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-09
Designated fault month 
and day
0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-10
Designated fault hour and 
minute
0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
FC-11
Logic information of 
designated fault
0–65535 0 -
●
FC-12
Curve information of 
designated fault
0–65535 0 -
●
FC-13
Set speed upon 
designated fault
0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FC-14
Feedback speed upon 
designated fault
0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FC-15
Bus voltage upon 
designated fault
0.0–999.9 0 V
●
FC-16
Current position upon 
designated fault
0.0–300.0 0 m
●
FC-17
Output current upon 
designated fault
0.0–999.9 0 A
●
FC-18
Output frequency upon 
designated fault
0.00–99.99 0 Hz
●
FC-19
Torque current upon 
designated fault
0.0–999.9 0 A
●





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 193 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-20 1st fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-21 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-22 1st fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-23 1st fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
FC-24 2nd fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-25 2nd fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-26 2nd fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-27 2nd fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
···
FC-56 10th fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-57 10th fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-58 10th fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-59 10th fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0 HH.MM
●
These parameters record the latest 10 faults of the elevator.
The fault code is a  4-digit number. The two high digits indicate the oor where the car is 
located when the fault occurs, and the two low digits indicate the fault code. For example, 
the 1st fault code is 0835, indicating that when the 1st fault (fault Err35) occurs, the car is 
near oor 8.
The fault subcode is used to locate the causes of the fault. The specific fault time is 
recorded in month, day, hour and minute.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FC-60 Latest fault code 0–9999 0 -
●
FC-61 Latest fault subcode 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-62 Latest fault month and day 0–1231 0 MM.DD
●
FC-63
Latest fault hour and minute 0–23.59 0
HH.MM
●
FC-64 Logic information of latest fault 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-65 Curve information of latest fault 0–65535 0 -
●
FC-66 Set speed upon latest fault 0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FC-67
Feedback speed upon latest 
fault
0.000–4.000 0 m/s
●
FC-68 Bus voltage upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 V
●
FC-69 Current position upon latest fault 0.0–300.0 0 m
●
FC-70 Output current upon latest fault 0–999.9 0 A
●
FC-71
Output frequency upon latest 
fault
0.00–99.99 0 Hz
●
FC-72 Torque current upon latest fault 0.0–999.9 0 A
●





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 194 -
Group Fd: Communication Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fd-00 Baud rate
0: 9600
1: 38400
0 bit/s
★
Fd-02 Local address
0–127
0: Broadcast address
1 -
★
Fd-03
Communication 
response delay
0–20 10 ms
★
Fd-04
Communication 
timeout
0.0–60.0
0: Invalid
0.0 s
★
These RS232 serial port communication parameters are used for communication with the 
monitor software in the host computer.
 
•
Fd-00 specifies the baud rate for serial communication. Fd-02 specifies the current 
address of the controller. The setting of these two parameters must be consistent with 
the setting of the serial port parameters on the host computer.
 
•
Fd-03 species the delay for the controller to send data by means of the serial port.
 
•
Fd-04 species the communication timeout time of the serial port. Transmission of each 
frame must be completed within the time set in Fd-04; otherwise, a communication fault 
occurs.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fd-05 Re-leveling stop delay 0.00–2.00 0.00 s
★
It is used to set the stop delay at re-leveling. After receiving the leveling signal during re-
leveling, the elevator stops after the delay set in this parameter.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit
Property
Fd-07 HCB:JP1 input
0: Reserved
NO/NC input: 
1/33: Elevator lock signal 
2/34: Fire emergency signal
3/35: Current oor forbidden
4/36: VIP oor signal
5/37: Security oor signal
6/38: Door close button input
1 -
★
Fd-08 HCB:JP2 input 2 -
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. 
The setting is effective to the HCBs for all oors.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 195 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fd-09 HCB:JP1 output
0: Invalid 
1: Up arrival indicator
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop output
5: Non-service state output
6: Door close button indicator 
output
1 -
★
Fd-10 HCB:JP2 output 2 -
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 1 and 4 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. The 
setting is effective to the HCBs for all oors.

Note

The output load capacity of the HCB is limited, with the output voltage of 24 V and the load power 
not larger than 1 W.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fd-11 HCB-B:JP1 input
0: Reserved
NO/NC input:
1/33: Light-load signal
2/34: Half-load signal 
3/35: Door 2 selection 
4/36: Door 2 restricted 
(back door forbidden)
5/37: Door 1 safety edge
6/38: Door 2 safety edge 
7/39: Single/double door 
selection
0 -
★
Fd-12 HCB-B:JP2 input 0 -
★
Fd-13 HCB-B:JP3 input 0 -
★
Fd-14 HCB-B:JP4 input 0 -
★
Fd-15 HCB-B:JP5 input 0 -
★
Fd-16
HCB-B:JP6 input 0 -
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 to JP6 on the HCB-B 
no-display parallel-serial conversion board. The setting is effective to all HCB-Bs connected 
to the system.





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 196 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fd-17 HCB-B:A1 output
0: Reserved
1: Fault output
2: Non-door zone stop 
output
3: Non-service state output
4: Fire emergency output
5: Power failure emergency 
output
6: Door lock valid
7: Night output signal
0 -
★
Fd-18 HCB-B:A2 output 0 -
★
Fd-19 HCB-B:B1 output 0 -
★
Fd-20 HCB-B:B2 output 0 -
★
Fd-21 HCB-B:C1 output 0 -
★
Fd-22 HCB-B:C2 output 0 -
★
Fd-23 HCB-B:C3 output 0 -
★
Fd-24 HCB-B:C4 output 0 -
★
Fd-25 HCB-B:C5 output 0 -
★
Fd-26 HCB-B:C6 output 0 -
★
These parameters are used to set the functions of four relay outputs and six open-collector 
outputs on the HCB-B no-display parallel-serial conversion board. The setting is effective to 
all HCB-Bs connected to the system.
Group FE: Elevator Function Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-00 Collective selective mode 0–2 0 -
★
It is used to set the collective selective mode of the system.
The values are as follows:
 
•
0: Full collective selective
The elevator responds to both up and down hall calls.
 
•
1: Down collective selective
The elevator responds to down hall calls but does not respond to up hall calls.
 
•
2: Up collective selective
The elevator responds to hall up calls but does not respond to hall down calls.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 197 -
Function 
Code
Parameter 
Name
Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-01 Floor 1 display
00: Display "0"
01: Display "1"
02: Display "2"
03: Display "3"
04: Display "4"
05: Display "5"
06: Display "6"
07: Display "7"
08: Display "8"
09: Display "9"
10: Display "A"
11: Display "B"
12: Display "G"
13: Display "H"
14: Display "L"
15: Display "M"
16: Display "P"
17: Display "R"
18: Display "-"
19: No display 
20: Display "12"
21: Display "13"
22: Display "23"
23: Display "C"
24: Display "D"
25: Display "E"
26: Display "F"
27: Display "I"
28: Display "J"
29: Display "K"
30: Display "N"
31: Display "O"
32: Display "Q"
33: Display "S"
34: Display "T"
35: Display "U"
36: Display "V"
37: Display "W"
38: Display "X"
39: Display "Y"
40: Display "Z"
41: Display "15"
42: Display "17"
43: Display "19"
1901 -
☆
FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 -
☆
FE-03 Floor 3 display 1903 -
☆
FE-04 Floor 4 display 1904 -
☆
FE-05 Floor 5 display 1905 -
☆
FE-06 Floor 6 display 1906 -
☆
FE-07 Floor 7 display 1907 -
☆
FE-08 Floor 8 display 1908 -
☆
FE-09 Floor 9 display 1909 -
☆
FE-10 Floor 10 display 0100 -
☆
Floor 11 to oor 30 display ···
FE-31 Floor 31 display 0301 -
☆
FE-35 Floor 32 display 0302 -
☆
FE-36 Floor 33 display 0303 -
☆
FE-37 Floor 34 display 0304 -
☆
FE-38 Floor 35 display 0305 -
☆
FE-39 Floor 36 display 0306 -
☆
FE-40 Floor 37 display 0307 -
☆
FE-41 Floor 38 display 0308 -
☆
FE-42 Floor 39 display 0309 -
☆
FE-43 Floor 40 display 0400 -
☆
These parameters are used to set the display of each oor. The setting range is 0000–9999, 
where the two high digits indicate the display code of the ten's digit, and the two low digits 
indicate the display code of the unit's digit.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-52 Highest digit selection 1
0–4099
0 -
☆
FE-53 Highest digit selection 2 0 -
☆
FE-54 Highest digit selection 3 0 -
☆
FE-55 Highest digit selection 4 0 -
☆
FE-56 Highest digit selection 5 0 -
☆
These parameters are used to set special oor display.
When the 2-digit display cannot meet the requirement, you can add the third-digit display 
by setting these parameters. In the values of these parameters, the two high digits indicate 
the oor address that requires special display, and the two low digits indicate the display 
content.
For example, if oor 18 needs to be displayed as "17A", set FE-18 to 0710 (display "7A"), 
and then set the highest digit display, that is, FE-52 to 1801 (indicating that the highest digit 
display of oor address 18 is "1").





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 198 -
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-32 Elevator function selection 1 0–65535 34816 -
☆
It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" 
indicates that the function is disabled.
FE-32 Elevator function selection 1
Bit  Function Description Default
Bit0 Reserved - 0
Bit1 Reserved - 0
Bit2
Re-leveling 
function
The elevator performs re-leveling at a low speed with 
door open. An external shorting door lock circuit contactor 
needs to be used together.
0
Bit3
Door pre-open 
function
During normal stop, when the elevator speed is smaller 
than a certain value and the door zone signal is active, 
the system shorts the door lock by means of the shorting 
door lock circuit contactor and outputs the door open 
signal, implementing door pre-open. This improves the 
elevator use efciency.
0
Bit4
Stuck hall call 
cancellation
The system automatically identies the state of the hall 
call buttons. If the state is abnormal, the system cancels 
the stuck hall call.
0
Bit5
Night security oor 
function
From 10:00 p.m to 6:00 a.m., the elevator runs to the 
security oor rst every time, stops and opens the door, 
and then runs to the destination oor.
0
Bit6
Down collective 
selective peak 
service
The peak service at down collective selective is used. 0
Bit7
Parallel peak 
service
The peak service in parallel control is used. 0
Bit8
Time-based 
service oor 
function
For details, see the description of related parameters in 
group F6.
0
Bit9 VIP function The VIP function is used. 0
Bit10 Reserved - 0
Bit11 Car call deletion
A call can be deleted by pressing the button twice 
consecutively.
1
Bit12 Hall call deletion 0
Bit13 Reserved - 0
Bit14 Reserved - 0
Bit15
Door lock short-
circuit detection
After detecting the door lock short-circuit, the system 
reports fault Err53.
1
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FE-33 Elevator function selection 2 0–65535 36 -
☆
It is used to set the elevator functions. "1" indicates that the function is enabled, and "0" 
indicates that the function is disabled.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 199 -
FE-33 Elevator Function Selection 2
Bit Function Description Default
Bit0 Reserved - 0
Bit1
Door open holding 
at open limit
The system still outputs the door open command 
upon door open limit.
0
Bit2
Door close 
command not 
output upon door 
close limit
The system stops outputting the door close 
command upon door close limit.
1
Bit3 Reserved - 0
Bit4
Auto reset for 
RUN and brake 
contactor stuck
If the feedback of the RUN and brake contactors is 
abnormal, faults Err36 and Err37 are reported, and 
you need to manually reset the system.
With this function, the system resets automatically 
after the fault symptom disappears. A maximum of 
three auto reset times are supported.
0
Bit5
Slow-down switch 
stuck detection
The system detects the state of slow-down switches. 
Once detecting that a slow-down switch is stuck, 
the system instructs the elevator to slow down 
immediately and reports a corresponding fault.
1
Bit6 Reserved - 0
Bit7 Forced door close
If the door still does not close within the time set in 
Fb-17 in automatic state, the system outputs the 
forced door close signal; at this moment, the light 
curtain becomes invalid and the buzzer tweets.
0
Bit8
NO shorting motor 
stator contactor
When Bit8 is set to 1, an NO shorting motor stator 
contactor is used.
0
Bit9
Immediate stop 
upon re-leveling
The elevator decelerates to stop immediately after 
receiving a single leveling signal during re-leveling. 
By default, when receiving a leveling signal, the 
elevator stops after the re-leveling stop delay set in 
Fd-05.
0
Bit10 
to 
Bit12
Reserved - 0
Bit13
High-speed 
elevator protection 
function
A maximum allowable speed is set when the car is 
in the slow-down switch position. When the elevator 
exceeds the speed at the position, the system 
outputs a protection signal.
0
Bit14 Reserved - 0
Bit15
Opposite door 
independent 
control
For details, see section 5.2.3. 0
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 200 -
Fr-00
Leveling 
adjustment function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 -
★
This parameter is used to enable the leveling adjustment function.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
Fr-01 Leveling adjustment record 1
00000–60060
30030 mm ★
Fr-02 Leveling adjustment record 2 30030 mm ★
… …
Fr-20 Leveling adjustment record 20 30030 mm ★
These parameters are used to record the leveling adjustment values. Each parameter 
records the adjustment information of two oors, and therefore, the adjustment information 
of 40 oors can be recorded totally.
The method of viewing the record is shown in the following gure.
Figure 7-9 Viewing the leveling adjustment record

 
Floor 1 Floor 2
Unit: mm

As shown  in the  preceding gure, the left two LEDs and the right  two LEDs  respectively 
show the adjustment bases of oor 1 and oor 2. If the value is larger than 30, it is upward 
leveling adjustment; if the value is smaller than 30, it is downward leveling adjustment. The 
default value "30" indicates that there is no leveling adjustment. The maximum adjustment 
range is ± 30 mm.
The leveling adjustment method is as follows:
17. Ensure that shaft auto-tuning is completed successfully, and the elevator runs properly 
at normal speed.
18. Set Fr-00 to 1 to enable the car leveling adjustment function. Then, the elevator shields 
hall calls, automatically runs to the top oor, and keeps the door open after arrival. If the 
elevator is at the top oor, it directly keeps the door open.
19. Go into the car, press the top oor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm 
upward; press the bottom floor button, and the leveling position is changed 1 mm 
downward. The value is displayed in the car.
Positive value: up arrow + value, negative value: down arrow + value, adjustment range: 
± 30 mm
20. After completing adjustment for the current oor, press the top oor button and bottom 
oor button in the car at the same time to save the adjustment result. The car display 
restores to the normal state. If the leveling position of the current floor need not be 
adjusted, press the top oor button and bottom oor button in the car at the same time 





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                        Description of Function Codes

- 201 -
to exit the leveling adjustment state. Then, car calls can be registered.
21. Press the door close button, and press the button for the next oor. The elevator runs 
to the next oor and keeps the door open after arrival. Then, you can perform leveling 
adjustment.
22. After completing adjustment for all floors, set Fr-00 to 0 to disable the leveling 
adjustment function. Otherwise, the elevator cannot be used.
Pay attention to the following precautions during the operation: 
1.  Each time shaft auto-tuning is performed, all leveling adjustment parameters can be 
cleared or reserved.
a.  If you set F1-11 to 3 on the operator or F7 to 1 on the keypad, all leveling 
adjustment parameters are reserved.
b.  If you set F1-11 to 4 on the operator or F-7 to 2 on the keypad, all leveling 
adjustment parameters are reserved.
2.  When the re-leveling function is used, the leveling adjustment function is automatically 
shielded and cannot be used.
Group FF: Factory Parameters
Group FP: User Parameters
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FP-00 User password 0–65535 0 -
☆
It is used to set the user password.
If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. After a 
password has been set and taken effect, you must enter the correct password in order to 
enter the menu. If the entered password is incorrect, you cannot view or modify parameters.
If FP-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared, and the password 
protection function is disabled.
Remember the password that you set. If the password is set incorrectly or forgotten, contact 
Monarch to replace the control board.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FP-01 Parameter update 0–2 0 -
★
It is used to set processing on the parameters.
The values are as follows:
 
•
0: No operation
 
•
1: Restore default settings
 
•
2: Clear fault records
If you set this parameter to 1 (Restore default settings), all parameters except group F1 are 





Description of Function Codes                                                                        NICE3000
new
 User Manual

- 202 -
restored to the default settings. Be cautions with this setting.
Function Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
FP-02
User-dened 
parameter display
0: Invalid
1: Valid
0 -
★
It is used to set whether to display the parameters that are modied.
When it is set to 1, the parameters that are different from the default setting are displayed.





8
EMC





EMC                                                                                                                    NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 204 -
Chapter 8 EMC
8.1 Denition of Terms
1.   EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) describes the ability of electronic and electrical 
devices or systems to work properly in the electromagnetic environment and not to 
generate electromagnetic interference that inuences other local devices or systems.
In other words, EMC includes two aspects: The electromagnetic interference generated 
by a device or system must be restricted within a certain limit; the device or system must 
have sufcient immunity to the electromagnetic interference in the environment.
2.   First environment
Environment that includes domestic premises, it also includes establishments directly 
connected without intermediate transformers to a low-voltage power supply network 
which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
3.   Second environment
Environment that includes all establishments other than those directly connected to a 
low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes
4.   Category C1 Controller
Power Drive System (PDS) of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the 
rst environment
5.   Category C2 Controller
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, which is neither a plug in device nor a movable 
device and, when used in the first environment, is intended to be installed and 
commissioned only by a professional
6.   Category C3 Controller
PDS of rated voltage less than 1 000 V, intended for use in the second environment and 
not intended for use in the rst environment
7.   Category C4 Controller
PDS of rated voltage equal to or above 1 000 V, or rated current equal to or above 400 
A, or intended for use in complex systems in the second environment
8.2 Introduction to EMC Standard
8.2.1 Installation Environment
The system manufacturer using the controller is responsible for compliance of the system 
with the European EMC directive. Based on the application of the system, the integrator 
must ensure that the system complies with standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2, C3 or 
C4.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                                     EMC

- 205 -
The system (machinery or appliance) installed with the controller must also have the CE 
mark. The system integrator is responsible for compliance of the system with the EMC 
directive and standard EN 61800-3: 2004 Category C2.

WARNING

If applied in the rst environment, the controller may generate radio interference. Besides the 
CE compliance described in this chapter, users must take measures to avoid such interference, 
if necessary.
8.2 2 Requirements on Satisfying the EMC Directive
1.  The controller requires an external EMC lter. The recommended lter models are listed 
in Table  8-1. The cable  connecting the  lter and the controller should be as short as 
possible and be not longer than 30 cm. Furthermore, install the lter and the controller 
on the same metal plate, and ensure that the grounding terminal of the controller and 
the grounding point of the lter are in good contact with the metal plate.
2.  Select the motor and the control cable according to the description of the cable in 
section 8.4.
3.  Install the controller and arrange the cables according to the cabling and grounding in 
section 8.4.
4.  Install an AC reactor to restrict the current harmonics. For the recommended models, 
see Table 8-2.
8.3 Selection of Peripheral EMC Devices
8.3.1 Installation of EMC Input Filter on Power Input Side
An EMC lter installed between the controller and the power supply can not only restrict the 
interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the controller, but 
also prevents the interference from the controller on the surrounding equipment.
The NICE3000
new
 controller satises the requirements of category C2 only with an EMC lter 
installed on the power input side. The installation precautions are as follows:
 
•
Strictly comply with the ratings when using the EMC lter. The EMC  lter is category 
I electric apparatus, and therefore, the metal housing ground of the filter should be 
in good contact with the metal ground of the installation cabinet on a large area, and 
requires good conductive continuity. Otherwise, it will result in electric shock or poor 
EMC effect.
 
•
The grounds of the EMC lter and the PE conductor of the controller must be tied to the 
same common ground. Otherwise, the EMC effect will be affected seriously.
 
•
The EMC lter should be installed as closely as possible to the power input side of the 
controller.
The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and models of EMC lters for the 
NICE3000
new
 controller. Select a proper one based on actual requirements.





EMC                                                                                                                    NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 206 -
Table 8-1 Recommended manufacturers and models of EMC lter
Controller Model
Power 
Capacity
Rated Input 
Current 
AC Input Filter Model AC Input Filter Model
kVA A Changzhou Jianli (Schaffner)
Three-phase 380 V
NICE-L-C-4002 4.0  6.5  DL-10EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
NICE-L-C-4003 5.9  10.5  DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
NICE-L-C-4005 8.9  14.8  DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
NICE-L-C-4007 11.0  20.5  DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
NICE-L-C-4011 17.0  29.0  DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
NICE-L-C-4015 21.0  36.0  DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
NICE-L-C-4018 24.0  41.0  DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
NICE-L-C-4022 30.0  49.5  DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-55-34
NICE-L-C-4030 40.0  62.0  DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-75-34
NICE-L-C-4037 57.0  77.0  DL-80EBK5 FN 3258-100-35
NICE-L-C-4045 69.0  93.0  DL-100EBK5 FN 3258-100-35
NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 DL-130EBK5 FN3258-130-35
Three-phase 220 V 
NICE-L-C-2002 4.0  11.0  DL-16EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
NICE-L-C-2003 5.9  17.0  DL-25EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0  29.0  DL-35EBK5 FN 3258-7-44
220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0  36.0  DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0   41.0 DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-16-33
220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0  40.0  DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0  49.0  DL-50EBK5 FN 3258-30-33
220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0  61.0  DL-65EBK5 FN 3258-42-33
Single-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 2.3  13.2  DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06
NICE-L-C-2003 3.4  17.0  DL-20TH1 FN2090-20-06
220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8  29.0  DL-30TH1 FN2090-30-08





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                                     EMC

- 207 -
Controller Model
Power 
Capacity
Rated Input 
Current 
AC Input Filter Model AC Input Filter Model
kVA A Changzhou Jianli (Schaffner)
220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1  36.0  DL-40K3
Consult the 
manufacturer.
220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9  41.0  DL-50T3
220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3  40.0  DL-50T3
220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1  49.0  DL-50T3
220-NICE-L-C-4030 33.0  61.0  DL-70TH1
8.3.2 Installation of AC Input Reactor on Power Input Side
An AC input reactor is installed to eliminate the harmonics of the input current. As an optional 
device, the reactor can be installed externally to meet strict requirements of an application 
environment for harmonics. The following table lists the recommended manufacturers and 
models of input reactors.
Table 8-2 Recommended manufacturers and models of AC input reactors
Controller Model
Power Capacity  Rated Input Current  AC Input Reactor Model
kVA (A) (Inovance)
Three-phase 380 V
NICE-L-C-4002 4.0  6.5  MD-ACL-7-4T-222-2%
NICE-L-C-4003 5.9  10.5  MD-ACL-10-4T-372-2%
NICE-L-C-4005 8.9  14.8  MD-ACL-15-4T-552-2%
NICE-L-C-4007 11.0  20.5  MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
NICE-L-C-4011 17.0  29.0  MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
NICE-L-C-4015 21.0  36.0  MD-ACL-40-4T-153-2%
NICE-L-C-4018 24.0  41.0  MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
NICE-L-C-4022 30.0  49.5  MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
NICE-L-C-4030 40.0  62.0  MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
NICE-L-C-4037 57.0  77.0  MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
NICE-L-C-4045 69.0  93.0  MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
NICE-L-C-4055 85 113 MD-ACL-120-4T-453-2%
Three-phase 220 V 
NICE-L-C-2002 4.0  11.0  MD-ACL-15-4T-222-2%
NICE-L-C-2003 5.9  17.0  MD-ACL-30-4T-222-2%





EMC                                                                                                                    NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 208 -
Controller Model
Power Capacity  Rated Input Current  AC Input Reactor Model
kVA (A) (Inovance)
220-NICE-L-C-4007 17.0  29.0  MD-ACL-30-4T-113-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4011 21.0  36.0  MD-ACL-50-4T-113-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4015 24.0   41.0 MD-ACL-50-4T-153-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4018 30.0  40.0  MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4022 40.0  49.0  MD-ACL-50-4T-183-2%
220-NICE-L-C-4030 57.0  61.0  MD-ACL-80-4T-303-2%
Single-phase 220 V
NICE-L-C-2002 2.3  13.2 
Consult the manufacturer.
NICE-L-C-2003 3.4  17.0 
220-NICE-L-C-4007 9.8  29.0 
220-NICE-L-C-4011 12.1  36.0 
220-NICE-L-C-4015 13.9  41.0 
220-NICE-L-C-4018 17.3  40.0 
220-NICE-L-C-4022 23.1  49.0 
220-NICE-L-C-4030 33.0  61.0 
8.4 Shielded Cable
8.4.1 Requirements for the Shielded Cable
The shielded cable must be used to satisfy the EMC requirements. Shielded cables are 
classied into three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable. If conductivity of the cable 
shield is not sufficient, add an independent PE cable, or use a four-conductor cable, of 
which one phase conductor is PE cable.
The three-conductor cable and four-conductor cable are shown in the following gure.

PE
Shield
PE conductor 
and shield
PE
Shield

The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as short 
as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and capacitive 
current of the cable.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                                     EMC

- 209 -
To suppress emission and conduction of the radio frequency interference effectively, the 
shield of the shielded cable is cooper braid. The braided density of the cooper braid should 
be greater than 90% to enhance the shielding efciency and conductivity, as shown in the 
following gure.

Cable 
core
Internal 
insulator
Copper braid
Copper shield
Insulation jacket

It is recommended that all control cables be shielded. The grounding area of the shielded 
cable should be as large as possible. A suggested method is to x the shield on the metal 
plate using the metal cable clamp so as to achieve good contact, as shown in the following 
gure.

Metal plate
Metal cable clamp
Shielded cable

The following gure shows the grounding method of the shielded cable.
Figure 8-1 Grounding of the shielded cable

The shield must 
be grounded.

8.4.2 Installation Precautions of the Shielded Cable
 
•
Symmetrical shielded cable is recommended. The four-conductor shielded cable can 
also be used as an input cable.
 
•
The motor cable and PE shielded conducting wire (twisted shielded) should be as 
short as possible to reduce electromagnetic radiation and external stray current and 
capacitive current of the cable. If the motor cable is over 100 meters long, an output 
lter or reactor is required.





EMC                                                                                                                    NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 210 -
 
•
It is recommended that all control cables be shielded.
 
•
It is recommended that a shielded cable be used as the output power cable of the AC 
drive; the cable shield must be well grounded. For devices suffering from interference, 
shielded twisted pair (STP) cable is recommended as the lead wire and the cable shield 
must be well grounded.
8.4.3 Cabling Requirement
1.  The motor cables must be laid far away from other cables, with recommended distance 
larger than 0.5 m. The motor cables of several controllers can be laid side by side.
2.  It is recommended that the motor cables, power input cables and control cables be laid 
in different ducts. To avoid electromagnetic interference caused by rapid change of the 
output voltage of the controller, the motor cables and other cables must not be laid side 
by side for a long distance.
3.  If the control cable must run across the power cable, make sure they are arranged at an 
angle of close to 90°. Other cables must not run across the controller.
4.  The power input and output cables of the controller and weak-current signal cables 
(such as control cable) should be laid vertically (if possible) rather than in parallel.
5.  The cable ducts must be in good connection and well grounded. Aluminium ducts can 
be used to improve electric potential.
6.  The filter, controller and motor should be connected to the system (machinery or 
appliance) properly, with spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal 
in full contact.
7.  The controller must be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying protection at the 
installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
8.  The filter must be connected to the cabinet properly, with spraying protection at the 
installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
9.  The motor should be connected to the system (machinery or appliance) properly, with 
spraying protection at the installation part and conductive metal in full contact.
Figure 8-2 Cabling diagram

NICE3000
new
integrated 
elevator 
controller
Min. 200 mm
Min. 300 mm
Power cable
Motor cable
Min. 500 mm
Min. 500 mm
Braking resistor cable
Motor cable
Power cable
90°
90°
90°
Control cable
Control cable
Power cable
Control cable
Control cable





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                                     EMC

- 211 -
8.5 Solutions to Common EMC Interference Problems
The controller generates very strong interference. Although EMC measures are taken, 
the interference may still exist due to improper cabling or grounding during use. When the 
controller interferes with other devices, adopt the following solutions. 
Interference Type Solution
Leakage protection 
switch tripping
 
•
Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
 
•
Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains power supply.
 
•
Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable.
 
•
Add magnetic rings to the input drive cable.
Controller 
interference during 
running
 
•
Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
 
•
Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
 
•
Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable 
with magnetic rings.
 
•
Add a safety capacitor to the interfered signal port or wind the signal 
cable with magnetic rings.
 
•
Connect the equipment to the common ground.
Communication 
interference
 
•
Connect the motor housing to the PE of the controller.
 
•
Connect the PE of the controller to the PE of the mains voltage.
 
•
Add a safety capacitor to the power input cable and wind the cable 
with magnetic rings.
 
•
Add a matching resistor between the communication cable source 
and the load side.
 
•
Add a common grounding cable besides the communication cable.
 
•
Use a shielded cable as the communication cable and connect the 
cable shield to the common grounding point.
I/O interference
 
•
Enlarge the capacitance at the low-speed DI. A maximum of 0.11 uF 
capacitance is suggested.
 
•
Enlarge the capacitance at the AI. A maximum of 0.22 uF is 
suggested.





EMC                                                                                                                    NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 212 -





9
Troubleshooting





Troubleshooting                                                                                                NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 214 -
Chapter 9 Troubleshooting
9.1 Description of Fault Levels
The NICE3000
new
 has almost 60 pieces of alarm information and protective functions. It 
monitors various input signals, running conditions and feedback signals. If a fault occurs, the 
system implements the relevant protective function and displays the fault code.
The controller is a complicated electronic control system and the displayed fault information 
is graded into ve levels according to the severity. The faults of different levels are handled 
according to the following table.
Table 9-1 Fault levels
Category Action Remarks
Level 1
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action 
command.
1A. The elevator running is not affected on any 
condition.
Level 2
1. Display fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action 
command.
3. Continue normal running of 
the elevator.
2A. The parallel function is disabled.
2B. The door pre-open/re-leveling function is 
disabled.
Level 3
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action 
command.
3. Stop output and apply the 
brake immediately after stop.
3A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops at 
special deceleration rate, and cannot restart.
3B. In low-speed running, the elevator does 
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator 
stops, and then can start running at low speed 
after a delay of 3s.
Level 4
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action 
command.
3. In distance control, the 
elevator decelerates to stop 
and cannot run again.
4A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops 
under special deceleration rate, and cannot 
restart.
4B. In low-speed running, the elevator does 
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator 
stops, and then can start running at low speed 
after a delay of 3s.
4C. In low-speed running, the elevator does 
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator 
stops, and then can start running at low speed 
after a delay of 3s.
Level 5
1. Display the fault code.
2. Output the fault relay action 
command.
3. The elevator stops 
immediately.
5A. In low-speed running, the elevator stops 
immediately and cannot restart.
5B. In low-speed running, the elevator does 
not stop. In normal-speed running, the elevator 
stops, and then can start running at low speed 
after a delay of 3s.





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                 Troubleshooting

- 215 -

Note

 
•
A, B, and C are fault sub-category.
 
•
Low-speed running involves inspection, emergency evacuation, shaft auto-tuning, re-leveling, 
motor auto-tuning, base oor detection, and running in operation panel control.
 
•
Normal-speed running involves automatic running, returning to base oor in re emergency 
state, reghter operation, attendant operation, elevator lock, and elevator parking.
9.2 Fault Information and Troubleshooting
If an alarm is reported, the system performs corresponding processing based on the fault 
level. You can handle the fault according to the possible causes described in the following 
table.
Table 9-2 Fault codes and troubleshooting
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err02
Over-current 
during 
acceleration
1. The main circuit 
output is grounded or 
short circuited.
2. Motor auto-tuning is 
performed improperly.
3. The load is too 
heavy.
4. The encoder signal 
is incorrect.
1. Check whether the RUN 
contactor at the controller output 
side is normal.
2. Check.
 
•
Whether the power cable jacket 
is damaged
 
•
Whether the power cable is 
possibly short circuited to ground
 
•
Whether the cable is connected 
reliably
3. Check the insulation of motor 
power terminals, and check 
WHETHER the motor winding is 
short-circuited or grounded.
4. Check whether the shorting 
PMSM stator contactor causes 
controller output short circuit.
5. Check whether motor parameters 
comply with the nameplate.
6. Perform motor auto-tuning again.
7. Check whether the brake keeps 
released before the fault occurs 
and whether the brake is stuck 
mechanically.
(To be continued)
5A





Troubleshooting                                                                                                NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 216 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err03
Over-current 
during 
deceleration
1. The main circuit 
output is grounded or 
short circuited.
2. Motor auto-tuning is 
performed improperly.
3. The load is too 
heavy.
4. The deceleration 
rate is too short.
5. The encoder signal 
is incorrect.
8. Check whether the balance 
coefcient is correct.
9. Check whether the encoder 
wirings are correct. For 
asynchronous motor, perform 
SFVC and compare the current to 
judge whether the encoder works 
properly.
10. Check:
 
•
Whether encoder pulses per 
revolution (PPR) is set correctly
 
•
Whether the encoder signal is 
interfered with
 
•
Whether the encoder cable runs 
through the duct independently
 
•
Whether the cable is too long
 
•
Whether the shield is grounded 
at one end
 
•
11. Check whether:
 
•
Whether the encoder is installed 
reliably
 
•
Whether the rotating shaft is 
connected to the motor shaft 
reliably
 
•
Whether the encoder is stable 
during normal-speed running
12. Check whether UPS feedback 
is valid in the non-UPS running 
state (Err02).
13. Check whether the acceleration/
deceleration rate is too high (Err02, 
Err03).
(End)
5A
Err04
Over-current at 
constant speed
1. The main circuit 
output is grounded or 
short circuited.
2. Motor auto-tuning is 
performed properly.
3. The load is too 
heavy.
4. The encoder is 
seriously interfered 
with.
5A





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                 Troubleshooting

- 217 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err05
Over-voltage 
during 
acceleration
1. The input voltage is 
too high.
2. The regeneration 
power of the motor is 
too high.
3. The braking 
resistance is too large, 
or the braking unit fails.
4. The acceleration rate 
is too short.
1. Adjust the input voltage. Observe 
whether the bus voltage is normal 
and whether it rises too quickly 
during running.
2. Check for the balance coefcient.
3. Select a proper braking 
resistor and check whether the 
resistance is too large based on the 
recommended braking resistance 
table in chapter 3.
4. Check:
 
•
Whether the cable connecting 
the braking resistor is damaged
 
•
Whether the cooper wire touches 
the ground
 
•
Whether the connection is 
reliable
5A
Err06
Over-voltage 
during 
deceleration
1. The input voltage is 
too high.
2. The braking 
resistance is too large, 
or the braking unit fails.
3. The deceleration 
rate is too short.
5A
Err07
Over-voltage at 
constant speed
1. The input voltage is 
too high.
2. The braking 
resistance is too large, 
or the braking unit fails.
5A
Err08
Pre-charge 
relay not close 
at power-on
1. The external power 
supply is instable.
2. The hardware is 
faulty.
1. Check whether the external 
power supply is stable and whether 
the wiring of all power input cables 
is secure.
2. Forbid frequently powering on 
the controller on the condition that 
the controller is not powered off 
completely.
3. For the hardware fault, contact 
the agent or Monarch.
5A
Err09 Under-voltage
1. Instantaneous power 
failure occurs on the 
input power supply.
2. The input voltage is 
too low.
3. The drive control 
board fails.
1. Eliminate external power supply 
faults and check whether the power 
fails during running.
2. Check whether the wiring of all 
power input cables is secure.
3. Contact the agent or Monarch.
5A





Troubleshooting                                                                                                NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 218 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err10
Controller 
overload
1. The brake circuit is 
abnormal.
2. The load is too 
heavy.
3. The encoder 
feedback signal is 
abnormal.
4. The motor 
parameters are 
incorrect.
5. A fault occurs on the 
motor power cables.
1. Check the brake circuit and 
power input.
2. Reduce the load.
3. Check whether the encoder 
feedback signal and setting are 
correct, and whether the initial 
angle of the encoder for the PMSM 
is correct.
4. Check the motor parameter 
setting and perform motor auto-
tuning.
5. Check the power cables of 
the motor (refer to the solution of 
Err02).
4A
Err11 Motor overload
1. FC-02 is set 
improperly.
2. The brake circuit is 
abnormal.
3. The load is too 
heavy.
1. Adjust the parameter (FC-02 can 
be set to the default value).
2. Refer to the solution of Err10.
3A
Err12
Power supply 
phase loss
1. The power input 
phases are not 
symmetric.
2. The drive control 
board fails.
1. Check whether the three phases 
of power supply are balanced 
and whether the power voltage is 
normal. If not, adjust the power 
input.
2. Contact the agent or Monarch.
4A
Err13
Power output 
phase loss
1. The output wiring 
of the main circuit is 
loose.
2. The motor is 
damaged.
1. Check the wiring.
2. Check whether the contactor on 
the output side is normal.
3. Eliminate the motor fault.
4A
Err14
Module 
overheat
1. The ambient 
temperature is too high.
2. The fan is damaged.
3. The air lter is 
blocked.
1. Lower the ambient temperature.
2. Clear the air lter.
3. Replace the damaged fan.
4. Check whether the installation 
clearance of the controller satises 
the requirement.
5A
Err16
Current control 
fault
1. The excitation 
current deviation is too 
large.
2. The torque current 
deviation is too large.
3. The torque limit is 
exceeded for a very 
long time.
1. Check the circuit of the encoder.
2. The output MCCB becomes OFF.
3. The values of the current loop 
parameters are too small.
4. Perform motor auto-tuning 
again if the zero-point position is 
incorrect.
5. Reduce the load if it too heavy.
5A





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                 Troubleshooting

- 219 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err17
Reference 
signal of 
the encoder 
incorrect
1. The deviation 
between the Z signal 
position and the 
absolute position is too 
large.
2. The deviation 
between the absolute 
position angle and the 
accumulative angle is 
too large.
1. Check whether the encoder runs 
properly.
2. Check whether the encoder 
wiring is correct and reliable.
3. Check whether the PG card 
wiring is correct.
4. Check whether the grounding of 
the control cabinet and the motor is 
normal.
5A
Err18
Current 
detection fault
The drive control board 
fails.
Contact the agent or Monarch. 5A
Err19
Motor auto-
tuning fault
1. The motor cannot 
rotate properly.
2. The motor auto-
tuning times out.
3. The encoder for the 
PMSM fails.
1. Enter the motor parameters 
correctly.
2. Check the motor wiring and 
whether phase loss occurs on the 
contactor at the output side.
3. Check the encoder wiring and 
ensure that the encoder PPR is set 
properly.
4. Check whether the brake keeps 
released during no-load auto-
tuning.
5. Check whether the inspection 
button is released before the PMSM 
with-load auto-tuning is nished.
5A
Err20
Speed 
feedback 
incorrect
1. The encoder model 
does not match the 
motor.
2. The encoder wiring 
is incorrect.
3. The current keeps 
large during low-speed 
running.
1. Check whether F1-00 is set 
correctly.
2. Check the encoder wiring.
3. If Err20 is reported in the stop 
state, check whether signal lines C, 
D of the SIN/COS encoder or signal 
lines U, V, W of the UVW encoder 
are broken.
4. Check whether the encoder is 
stuck mechanically during running.
5. Check whether the brake keeps 
released during running.
5A
Err22
Leveling signal 
abnormal
The leveling position 
deviation is too large.
1. Check whether the leveling and 
door zone sensors work properly.
2. Check the installation verticality 
and depth of the leveling plates.
3. Check the leveling signal input 
points of the MCB.
4. Check whether the steel rope 
slips.
1A





Troubleshooting                                                                                                NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 220 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err24 RTC clock fault
The RTC clock 
information of the MCB 
is abnormal.
1. Replace the clock battery.
2. Replace the MCB.
3B
Err25
Storage data 
abnormal
The storage data of the 
MCB is abnormal.
Contact the agent or Monarch. 4A
Err26
Earthquake 
signal
The earthquake signal 
is active and the 
duration exceeds 2s.
Check whether the earthquake 
signal is consistent with the 
parameter setting (NC, NO) of the 
MCB.
3B
Err29
Shorting 
PMSM stator 
feedback 
abnormal
The shorting PMSM 
stator feedback is 
abnormal.
1. Check whether the state (NO, 
NC) of the feedback contact on 
the contactor is consistent with the 
parameter setting of the MCB.
2. Check whether the state of the 
MCB output indicator is consistent 
with the contactor action.
3. Check whether corresponding 
feedback contact acts after the 
contactor acts, and whether the 
corresponding feedback input point 
of the MCB acts correctly.
4. Check whether the shorting 
PMSM stator contactor is consistent 
with the MCB output feature.
5. Check the coil circuit of the 
shorting PMSM stator contactor.
3B
Err30
Elevator 
position 
abnormal
1. The automatic 
running time of the 
elevator is too long.
2. The re-leveling 
running time of the 
elevator is too long.
3. The up/down limit 
switch acts during the 
re-leveling process.
4. The steel rope slips 
or locked-rotor occurs 
on the motor.
1. Check whether the up/down limit 
switch acts during re-leveling.
2. Check whether the leveling 
signal cables are connected reliably 
and whether the signal copper 
wires may touch the ground or be 
short circuited with other signal 
cables.
3. Check whether the distance 
between two oors is too large, 
causing too long re-leveling running 
time.
4. Check whether F9-02 is set 
properly (greater than the whole 
normal-speed running time).
5. Check whether signal loss exists 
in the encoder circuits.
4A





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                 Troubleshooting

- 221 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err33
Elevator speed 
abnormal
1. The detected running 
speed exceeds the 
upper protection limit.
2. The speed exceeds 
the limit during self-
sliding.
3. The speed exceeds 
the limit or re-leveling 
is not performed within 
the required time during 
emergency running.
1. Check whether the encoder is 
used properly.
2. Check the setting of motor 
nameplate parameters. Perform 
motor auto-tuning again.
3. Check whether the inspection 
signal acts at normal speed 
running.
4. Check the inspection switch and 
signal cables.
5. Check whether the emergency 
power capacity meets the 
requirements.
6. Check whether the emergency 
running speed is set properly.
5A
Err34 Logic fault
Logic of the MCB is 
abnormal
Contact the agent or Monarch. 4C
Err35
Shaft auto-
tuning data 
abnormal
1. The elevator is not at 
the bottom oor when 
shaft auto-tuning is 
started.
2. No leveling signal 
is received within 45s 
continuous running.
3. The distance 
between two oors is 
too small.
4. The maximum 
number of landing 
oors is inconsistent 
with the setting value.
5. The oor pulses 
change inversely.
6. The system is not 
in the inspection state 
when shaft auto-tuning 
is performed.
7. Shaft auto-tuning 
is not performed upon 
power-on.
1. If Err35 is reported when the 
RUN contactor is not closed, check:
 
•
Whether the next slow-down 
switch is valid
 
•
Whether F4-01 (Current oor) is 
set to 1
 
•
Whether the inspection switch is 
in inspection state and supports 
inspection running
 
•
Whether F0-00 is set to 1
2. If Err35 is reported at the rst 
leveling position, check:
 
•
Whether the value of F4-03 
increases in UP direction and 
decreases in DOWN direction. 
If not, exchange the MCBs PGA 
and PGB.
 
•
Whether the NO/NC setting 
of the leveling sensor is set 
correctly
 
•
Whether the leveling plates are 
inserted properly if the leveling 
sensor signal blinks
(To be continued)
4C





Troubleshooting                                                                                                NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 222 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err35
Shaft auto-
tuning data 
abnormal
1. The elevator is not at 
the bottom oor when 
shaft auto-tuning is 
started.
2. No leveling signal 
is received within 45s 
continuous running.
3. The distance 
between two oors is 
too small.
4. The maximum 
number of landing 
oors is inconsistent 
with the setting value.
5. The oor pulses 
change inversely.
6. The system is not 
in the inspection state 
when shaft auto-tuning 
is performed.
7. Shaft auto-tuning 
is not performed upon 
power-on.
3. If Err35 is reported during 
running, check:
 
•
Whether the running times out: 
No leveling signal is received 
when the running time exceeds 
F9-02
 
•
Whether the super short oor 
function is enabled when the 
oor distance is less than 50 cm
 
•
Whether the setting of F6-00 
(Top oor of the elevator) is 
smaller than the actual condition
4: If Err35 is reported when the 
elevator arrives at the top oor, 
check:
 
•
Whether the obtained top oor of 
the elevator and bottom oor of 
the elevator are consistent with 
the setting of F6-00 and F6-01 
when the up slow-down signal is 
valid and the elevator reaches 
the door zone
 
•
Whether the obtained oor 
distance is less than 50 cm
5. If Err35 is reported at power-on, 
check whether the detected ag 
length is 0.
(End)
4C
Err36
RUN contactor 
feedback 
abnormal
1. The feedback of 
the RUN contactor 
is effective at startup 
of the elevator, but 
the contactor has no 
output.
2. The controller 
outputs the RUN signal 
but receives no RUN 
feedback during the 
startup.
3. When both feedback 
signals of the RUN 
contactor are enabled, 
their states are 
inconsistent.
1. Check whether the feedback 
contact of the contactor acts 
properly.
2. Check the signal feature (NO, 
NC) of the feedback contact.
3. Check whether the output 
cables UVW of the controller are 
connected properly.
4. Check whether the control circuit 
of the RUN contactor coil is normal.
5A





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                 Troubleshooting

- 223 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err37
Brake 
contactor 
feedback 
abnormal
1. The output of the 
brake contactor is 
inconsistent with the 
feedback.
2. When both feedback 
signals of the brake 
contactor are enabled, 
their states are 
inconsistent.
1. Check whether the brake coil 
and feedback contact are correct.
2. Check the signal feature (NO, 
NC) of the feedback contact.
3. Check whether the control 
circuit of the brake contactor coil is 
normal.
5A
Err38
Encoder signal 
abnormal
1. There is no input 
of the encoder pulses 
when the elevator runs 
automatically.
2. The direction of the 
input encoder signal 
is incorrect when 
the elevator runs 
automatically.
3. F0-00 is set to 0 
(SFVC) in distance 
control.
1. Check whether the encoder is 
used correctly.
2. Exchange phases A and B of the 
encoder.
3. Check the setting of F0-00, and 
change it to CLVC.
4. Check whether the system and 
signal cables are grounded reliably.
5. Check whether cabling between 
the encoder and the PG card is 
correct.
5A
Err39 Motor overheat
The motor overheat 
relay input remains 
valid for a certain time.
1. Check whether the thermal 
protection relay is normal.
2. Check whether the motor is used 
properly and whether it is damaged.
3. Improve cooling conditions of the 
motor.
3A
Err40
Elevator 
running 
timeout
The set elevator 
running time is 
reached.
The elevator is used for a long time 
and needs maintenance.
4B
Err41
Safety circuit 
breaking off
The safety circuit signal 
is cut off.
1. Check the safety circuit switches 
and their states.
2. Check whether the external 
power supply is normal.
3. Check whether the safety circuit 
contactor acts properly.
4. Conrm the signal feature (NO, 
NC) of the feedback contact of the 
safety circuit contactor.
5A





Troubleshooting                                                                                                NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 224 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err42
Door lock 
breaking off 
during running
The door lock circuit 
feedback is invalid 
during the elevator 
running.
1. Check whether the hall door lock 
and the car door lock are in good 
contact.
2. Check whether the door lock 
contactor acts properly.
3. Check the signal feature (NO, 
NC) of the feedback contact on the 
door lock contactor.
4. Check whether the external 
power supply is normal.
5A
Err43
Up limit signal 
abnormal
The up limit switch acts 
when the elevator is 
running upward.
1. Check the signal feature (NO, 
NC) of the up limit switch.
2. Check whether the up limit 
switch is in good contact.
3. Check whether the limit switch 
is installed at a relatively low 
position and acts even when the 
elevator arrives at the terminal oor 
normally.
4C
Err44
Down limit 
signal 
abnormal
The down limit switch 
acts when the elevator 
is running downward.
1. Check the signal feature (NO, 
NC) of the down limit switch.
2. Check whether the down limit 
switch is in good contact.
3. Check whether the limit switch is 
installed at a relatively high position 
and thus acts even when the 
elevator arrives at the terminal oor 
normally.
4C
Err45
Slow-down 
switch position 
abnormal
1. The slow-down 
signal is abnormal.
2. The obtained slow-
down distance is 
incorrect during shaft 
auto-tuning.
1. Check whether the up slow-down 
1 and the down slow-down 1 are in 
good contact.
2. Check the signal feature (NO, 
NC) of the up slow-down 1 and the 
down slow-down 1.
3. Ensure that the obtained slow-
down distance satises the slow-
down requirement at the elevator 
speed.
4B





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                 Troubleshooting

- 225 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err46
Re-leveling 
abnormal
1. The re-leveling 
running speed exceeds 
0.1 m/s.
2. The elevator is out of 
the door zone when re-
leveling.
3. The feedback of 
the shorting door 
lock circuit contactor 
is abnormal during 
running.
1. Check the original and secondary 
wiring of the shorting door lock 
circuit relay.
2. Check whether the shorting door 
lock circuit contactor feedback 
function is enabled and whether the 
feedback signal is normal.
3. Check whether the encoder is 
used properly.
2B
Err47
Shorting door 
lock circuit 
contactor 
abnormal
1. The feedback of 
the shorting door lock 
circuit contactor is 
abnormal when the 
door pre-open and re-
leveling function is 
enabled.
2. The output of the 
shorting door lock 
circuit contactor times 
out.
3. The elevator speed 
exceeds the limit during 
running in the condition 
that the shorting door 
lock circuit function is 
enabled.
1. Check the signal feature (NO, 
NC) of the feedback contact on the 
shorting door lock circuit contactor.
2. Check whether the shorting door 
lock circuit contactor acts properly.
3. Check whether the elevator 
running speed at door pre-open or 
re-leveling is set properly.
2B
Err48 Door open fault
The consecutive times 
that the door does 
not open to the limit 
reaches the setting in 
Fb-13.
1. Check whether the door machine 
system works properly.
2. Check whether the CTB is 
normal.
3. Check whether the door open 
limit signal is normal.
5A
Err49
Door close 
fault
The consecutive times 
that the door does 
not open to the limit 
reaches the setting in 
Fb-13.
1. Check whether the door machine 
system works properly.
2. Check whether the CTB is 
normal.
3. Check whether the door lock 
acts properly.
5A





Troubleshooting                                                                                                NICE3000
new
  User  Manual                                                 

- 226 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err51
CAN 
communication 
abnormal
Feedback data 
of CANbus 
communication with the 
CTB remains incorrect.
1. Check the communication cable 
connection.
2. Check the power supply of the 
CTB.
3. Check whether the 24 V power 
supply of the controller is normal.
4. Check whether strong-power 
interference on communication 
exists.
1A
Err52
HCB 
communication 
abnormal
Feedback data 
of Modbus 
communication with the 
HCB remains incorrect.
1. Check the communication cable 
connection.
2. Check whether the 24 V power 
supply of the controller is normal.
3. Check whether the HCB 
addresses are repeated.
4. Check whether strong-power 
interference on communication 
exists.
1A
Err53 Door lock fault
In the automatic 
running state, the 
relevant door lock 
signal is abnormal.
1. Check whether the door lock 
circuit is normal.
2. Check whether the feedback 
contact of the door lock contactor 
acts properly.
3. Check whether the system 
receives the door open limit signal 
when the door lock signal is valid.
4. Check whether when the hall 
door lock signal and the car door 
lock signal are detected separately, 
the detected states of the hall 
door locks and car door lock are 
inconsistent.
5A
Err55
Stop at another 
landing oor
During automatic 
running of the elevator, 
the door open limit is 
not achieved at the 
present oor.
Check the door open limit signal at 
the present oor.
1A
Err57
Serial 
peripheral 
interface (SPI) 
communication 
abnormal
The SPI 
communication is 
abnormal.
1. Check the wiring between the 
control board and the drive board.
2. Contact the agent or Monarch.
5A





NICE3000
new
 User Manual                                                                                                 Troubleshooting

- 227 -
Fault 
Code 
Name Possible Causes Solution Level
Err58
Shaft position 
switches 
abnormal
1. The up limit and 
down limit switches are 
valid simultaneously.
2. The up slow-down 
and down slow-down 
switches are valid 
simultaneously.
1. Check whether the states (NO, 
NC) of the slow-down switches and 
limit switches are consistent with 
the parameter setting of the MCB
2. Check whether malfunction of 
the slow-down switches and limit 
switches exists.
4B

Note

 
•
Fault Err41 is not recorded in the elevator stop state.
 
•
Fault Err42 is reset automatically when the door lock circuit is shorted or 1s after the fault 
occurs in the door zone.
 
•
If faults Err51 and Err52 persist, they are recorded once every one hour.









Warranty Agreement
1.  The warranty period of the product is 18 months (refer to the barcode on the 
equipment). During the warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the 
condition of normal use by following the instructions, Monarch will be responsible for 
free maintenance.
2.  Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the 
following reasons:
a. Improper use or repair/modication without prior permission
b. Fire, ood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster
c. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement
d. Improper operation
e. Damage out of the equipment (for example, external device)
3.  If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product 
Warranty Card in detail.
4.  The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of 
Monarch.
5.  The Product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the 
maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
6.  If there is any problem during the service, contact Monarch's agent or Monarch directly. 
7.  This agreement shall be interpreted by Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.
Service Department, Suzhou MONARCH Control Technology Co., Ltd.
Address: 16, Youciang Rd, Wangshan Industrial Park, Wuzhong Economic Development 
Zone, Suzhou, China    P.C.: 215104
Website: http://www.szmctc.cn





Product Warranty Card
Customer 
information
Add. of unit:
Name of unit:
P.C.:
Contact person:
Tel.:
Product 
information
Product model:
Body barcode (Attach here):
Name of agent:
Failure 
information 
(Maintenance time and content):
Maintenance personnel: